Display construct and framing for media projection

ABSTRACT

Disclosed herein are systems, apparatuses, methods, and non-transitory computer readable media related to display constructs that can be fixed or movable. The display constructs may be is at least partially transparent and can be viewed therethrough. Display constructs may be arranged in planar matrices, e.g., using one or more retaining clips.

PRIORITY APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/246,770, filed Sep. 21, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/212,483, filed Jun. 18, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/170,245, filed Apr. 2, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/154,352, filed Feb. 26, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/115,842, filed Nov. 19, 2020, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/211,400, filed Jun. 16, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT AND FRAMING FOR MEDIA PROJECTION,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/135,021, filed Jan. 8, 2021, titled “CONFIGURATION OF MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY,” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/247,684 filed Sep. 23, 2021, titled “CONFIGURATION ASSOCIATED WITH MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY.” This application also claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/115,842, filed Nov. 19, 2020, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION,” and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/154,352, filed Feb. 26, 2021, titled “DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING.” This application claims priority as a Continuation-In-Part from International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641, filed Sep. 30, 2020, titled “TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY,” which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/911,271, filed Oct. 5, 2019, titled “TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY,” from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/952,207, filed Dec. 20, 2019, titled “TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY,” from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/975,706, filed Feb. 12, 2020, titled “TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY,” from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/085,254, filed Sep. 30, 2020, titled “TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY.” International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/950,774, filed Nov. 17, 2020, titled “DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/608,157, filed Oct. 24, 2019, titled “DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a National Stage Entry of International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US18/29476, filed Apr. 25, 2018, titled “DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which claims priority from (i) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/607,618, filed Dec. 19, 2017, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY FIELD,” (ii) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/523,606, filed Jun. 22, 2017, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY,” (iii) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/507,704, filed May 17, 2017, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY,” (iv) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/506,514, filed May 15, 2017, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY,” and (v) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/490,457, filed Apr. 26, 2017, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY.” International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a Continuation-In-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/083,128, filed Oct. 28, 2020, titled “BUILDING NETWORK,” which is a Continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/664,089, filed Oct. 25, 2019, titled “BUILDING NETWORK,” that is a National Stage Entry of International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US19/30467, filed May 2, 2019, titled “EDGE NETWORK FOR BUILDING SERVICES,” which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/666,033, filed May 2, 2018, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/083,128, is also a Continuation-In-Part of International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US18/29460, filed Apr. 25, 2018 titled “TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM FOR BUILDING SERVICES,” which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/607,618, U.S. to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/523,606, from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/507,704, from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/506,514, and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/490,457. International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a Continuation-In-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/081,809, filed Oct. 27, 2020, titled “TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM,” which is a Continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/608,159, filed Oct. 24, 2019, titled “TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM,” that is a National Stage Entry of International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US18/29406, filed Apr. 25, 2018, titled “TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM,” which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/607,618, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/523,606, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/507,704, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/506,514, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/490,457. This application also claims priority as a Continuation-in-Part from U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/338,562, filed Jun. 3, 2021, titled “DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/950,774, filed Nov. 17, 2020, titled “DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS”. Each of the above recited patent documents is entirely incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND

Various facilities (e.g., buildings) have windows installed, e.g., in their facades. The windows provide a way to view an environment external to the facility. In some facilities, the window may take a substantial portion of a facility facade. Users may request utilization of the window surface area to view various media (e.g., for entertainment purposes, to process data, and/or to conduct a video conference). At times, a user may want to optimize usage of interior space to visualize the media (e.g., by using the window surface). The media may be electronic media and/or optical media. A user may request viewing the media with minimal impact on visibility through the window. The media may be displayed via a display that is at least partially transparent. At times viewing the media may require a tinted (e.g., darker) backdrop. At times, the user may want to shade its interior surrounding. At times, the lifetime of the media display, (e.g., an OLED display) may be damaged over time, e.g., by Ultra-Violet (UV) irradiation, heat, and atmosphere constituents. Such harm may reduce prolonged use of the media display. At times a user may want to augment external view with overlays, augmented reality, and/or lighting. In certain settings, it may be beneficial to have an architectural element that facilitates (e.g., simultaneous) viewing of two (e.g., identical or different) media displayed at opposite sides of the architectural element (e.g., structure), and view through the architectural element (e.g., when the media is not displayed and/or when the media is displayed). In certain configurations, it may be beneficial to move the display construct (e.g., in real time during its operation, and/or when the display construct is not operational). The present inventions offer a solution to this and other problems.

SUMMARY

In an aspect disclosed herein is a display construct that is coupled with a window (e.g., a viewing window such as a tintable window). The viewing window may or may not include an integrated glass unit. The display construct may include one or more glass panes. The display may comprise at least one display matrix. The display matrix may comprise a light emitting diode (LED), e.g., that is at least partially transparent (e.g., a TOLED display construct). The display may comprise liquid crystal display (LCD).

In an aspect disclosed herein is a display construct that comprises an intermediate supportive structure and at least one pair of display matrices that display media at opposite sides of the supportive structure that supports the at least one pair of display matrices. The supportive structure and display matrices may be at least partially transparent to visible light. The display construct may be installed in a framing that couples to a railing, thus facilitating its (e.g., lateral) mobility. The framing may be configured to accommodate one or more circuit boards that facilitate the display of the media on the display matrices.

In another aspect disclosed herein is a strengthening application to any lamination defect, e.g., in the rim of the display construct.

In another aspect, a device for aligning media displays of a matrix of media displays, the device comprises: a retaining clip configured to (i) be mounted to a first media display and to a second media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first media display and of the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (iii) retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display and of the second media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display, and (iv) be disposed adjacent to a first end of the first media display and to a second end of the second media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display in the matrix of media displays.

In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display, of the second media display, and of a supportive structure to which the first media display and the second media display are coupled to, during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configure to be removably mounted to the first media display and to the second media display. In some embodiments, the first media display is immediately adjacent to the second media display without having any other media display disposed therebetween. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to be removably mounted to the first media display and to the second media display at least in part by being configured to engage and disengage with the first media display and with the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to be removably mounted (a) to the first media display through a first framing of the first media display, and (b) to the second media display through a second framing of the second media display. In some embodiments, the first media display is coupled to a side of a supportive panel on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end. In some embodiments, the first media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a first hinge, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a second hinge. In some embodiments, the first hinge facilitates swiveling of the first media display with respect to the supportive panel about a first hinge joint, and wherein the second hinge facilitates swiveling of the second media display with respect to the supportive panel about a second hinge joint. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to hinder (e.g., prevent) swiveling of the first media display and the second media display when the retaining clip is mounted to the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the first media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel through a framing of the supportive panel, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel through the framing of the supportive panel. In some embodiments, the supportive panel comprises a window. In some embodiments, the window is a tintable window. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media displays are configured to be controlled by a control system. In some embodiments, at least one of the media displays is configured to communicatively couple to one or more controllers configured to control a display of (e.g., electronic and/or digital) media on the at least one of the media displays, which one or more controllers are included in the control system. In some embodiments, at least one of the media displays is configured to communicatively couple to a first controller of the control system, and wherein the tintable window is configured to communicatively couple to a second controller of the control system. In some embodiments, at least one of the media displays is configured to communicatively couple to a first controller of the control system, which first controller is disposed in a window frame housing of the tintable window. In some embodiments, the control system is a hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, the control system (i) comprises a distributed network of controllers, (ii) is configured to control different devices of the facility other than the device, (iii) is configured to control messaging relating to the facility, and/or (iv) is configured to control the facility. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to control the facility at least in part by being configured to control (I) an environment of the facility, (II) a building management system of the facility, and/or (III) presence of personnel in the facility. In some embodiments, messaging relating the facility include educational, entertainment, safety, health, work, greetings, scheduling, and/or otherwise informative messaging. In some embodiments, the different devices comprise one or more sensors, one or more emitters, one or more transceiver, or one or more tintable windows. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors comprise an environmental sensor. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors comprise a temperature sensor, volatile organic compound (VOC) sensor, particulate matter sensor, gas sensor, pressure sensor, accelerometer, sound sensor, or an electromagnetic sensor. In some embodiments, the one or more emitters comprise lighting, heater, cooler, ventilator, speaker, chemical emitter, heating cooling and ventilation (HVAC) system, or media display. In some embodiments, the one or more transceivers comprise a radio, or an antenna. In some embodiments, the antenna comprises a radar, a distributed antenna system (DAS), or a small cell. In some embodiments, the antenna is configured for cellular communication of at least a third (3G), fourth (4G), or fifth (5G) generation cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, the one or more tintable windows comprise an electrochromic window. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media displays are operatively coupled to a network. In some embodiments, the network is configured to communicatively couple to a building management system. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate adjustment of an environment of a facility. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media displays are configured to receive power from the network. In some embodiments, a portion of the network is contained in a facility and a second portion of the network is located remote from the facility. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the network is disposed in an envelope of an enclosure of the facility, wherein the enclosure optionally comprises a building. In some embodiments, the network comprises a first network installed in the facility. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit communication and power on a single cable. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit different types of communication on a single cable. In some embodiments, the different types of communication comprise a control signal, a cellular signal, sensor data, video, pictures, sound, or another data type. In some embodiments, the other data type comprises digital or electronic data. In some embodiments, the cellular signal conforms to at least a third (3G), fourth (4G), or fifth (5G) generation cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, the control signal conforms to a Building Automation and Control (BAC) protocol. In some embodiments, the network is configured to operatively couple to at least one controller. In some embodiments, the network is configure to operatively couple to (i) one or more controllers optionally forming a control system, (ii) different devices of the facility other than the device, (iii) communicate messaging relating to the facility, and/or (iv) is configured to facilitate control the facility. In some embodiments, the first media display includes a first pin extending therefrom, the second media display includes a second pin extending therefrom, and the retaining clip is configured to engage with the first pins and with the second pin, to facilitate (i) the alignment of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or (ii) retain, or substantially retain, the relative positions of the first media display and the second media display over time and/or during operation. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to couple to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm extending in a first direction across a window and secured to a window framing system, (ii) a second arm extending in a second direction, generally normal to the first direction, which second arm extends across the media display matrix and is configured to secure the media display to the window framing system, and (iii) a joint securing the first arm to the second arm and removably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portion that is disposed between the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip comprises (i) a first leg configured to align the first media display with the second media in the same plane or in the substantially same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, and (ii) a second leg extending from the joint generally normal from the first leg and configured to facilitate mounting of the retaining clip. In some embodiments, the second leg is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent movement, of the first media display relative to the second media display upon engagement. In some embodiments, the interior framing portion includes a semi-permeable material (a) between the first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays, and/or (b) between the second arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises a thickness to fill a gap between the first arm and the first media display, the first arm and the second media display, the second arm and the first media display and/or the second arm and the second media display. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material is configured to compress to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material is configured to allow for air flow through the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to engage and cradle upon engagement: a first pin of the first media display and a second pin of the second media display. In some embodiments, the first pin is configured to protrude from a first framing of the first media display and/or wherein the second pin is configured to protrude from a second framing of the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to (i) be mounted to the first media display, to the second media display, to a third media display, and to a fourth media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (iii) retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display, and (iv) be disposed adjacent to the first end of the first media display, to the second end of the second media display, to a third end of the third media display and to a fourth end of the fourth media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the third media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the fourth media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the first media display, in the matrix of media displays. In some embodiments, the retaining clip comprises (i) a first leg extending from a retaining clip center, which first leg is configured to align the first media display with the second media in the same plane or in the substantially same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, (ii) a second leg extending from the retaining clip center in a lateral direction opposite to that of the first leg, which second leg is configured to align the third media display with the fourth media in the same plane or in the substantially same plane, wherein the third media display is coupled to the second leg on a third side of the third media display opposing a third end of the third media display, wherein the fourth media display is coupled to the second leg on a fourth side of the fourth media display opposing a fourth end of the fourth media display, and (iii) a third leg extending generally normal from the first leg and the second leg, which third leg is configured to facilitating mounting of the retaining clip. In some embodiments, the first leg is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent movement, of the first media display relative to the second media display upon engagement, and/or wherein the second leg is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent movement, of the third media display relative to the fourth media display upon engagement. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to engage and cradle upon engagement: a first pin of the first media display, a second pin of the second media display, a third pin of the third media display, and a fourth pin of the fourth media display. In some embodiments, (i) the first pin is configured to protrude from a first framing of the first media display, (ii) the second pin is configured to protrude from a second framing of the second media display, (iii) the third pin is configured to protrude from a third framing of the third media display, and/or (iv) the fourth pin is configured to protrude from a fourth framing of the fourth media display. In some embodiments, the first arm is generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the first arm and the second arm are each generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature and/or the second leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the joint includes a boss, which boss is configured to operatively engage the retaining clip to removably secure the retaining clip to the joint. In some embodiments, the retaining clip includes a fastener extending therethrough, which fastener selectively secures the retaining clip to the joint. In some embodiments, the interior framing portion includes a stiffener flange extending from the boss along at least a portion of the joint. In some embodiments, each of the first media display and the second media display includes a pin extending therefrom, and the retaining clip selectively operatively engages the pins to facilitate the alignment of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and retain, or substantially retain, the relative positions of the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip includes a fastener extending therethrough, which fastener selectively secures the retaining clip to a window framing system. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to couple to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm that extends across a window and is secured to a window framing system, wherein the first arm comprises a curvature with upstanding flanges, and (ii) a semi-permeable material configured to mount between the first arm and the first media display, the second media display or both the first and second media displays. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises a thickness to fill a gap between the first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display, or (iii) both the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material is configured to compress to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material is mounted between the upstanding flanges. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material is configured to allow for air flow through the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, wherein the interior framing portion includes a boss, which boss operatively engages retaining clip to removably secure the retaining clip to the window framing system.

In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of a media display matrix, the method comprises: mounting and/or using the retaining clip with media display(s) of the media display matrix of any of the devices disclosed above.

In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of a media display matrix, the method comprises: using any of the retaining clip(s), e.g., to align media display(s) of the media display matrix of any of the devices disclosed above.

In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of a media display matrix, the method comprises: mounting a retaining clip with a first media display and with a second media display, which mounting facilitates (i) aligning of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (ii) retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media display and of the second media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display, which retaining clip is mounted such that it is disposed adjacent to a first end of the first media display and to a second end of the second media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display in the matrix of media displays.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises engaging the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display such that the retaining clip retains, or substantially retains, relative positions of the first media display, of the second media display, and of a supportive structure to which the first media display and the second media display are coupled to. In some embodiments, the method further comprises placing the first media display immediately adjacent to the second media display without having any other media display disposed therebetween. In some embodiments, the method further comprises removably mounting the retaining clip to the first media display and to the second media display at least in part by engaging and disengaging with the first media display and with the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises removably mounting the retaining clip (a) to the first media display through a first framing of the first media display, and (b) to the second media display through a second framing of the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises coupling the first media display to a side of a supportive panel on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, and coupling the second media display to the side of the supportive panel on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end. In some embodiments, the method further comprises coupling the first media display to the side of the supportive panel with a first hinge, and coupling the second media display to the side of the supportive panel with a second hinge. In some embodiments, the method further comprises coupling the first media display to the side of the supportive panel through a framing of the supportive channel, and coupling the second media display to the side of the supportive panel through the framing of the supportive panel. In some embodiments, the supportive panel comprises a window. In some embodiments, the supportive panel comprises a tintable window. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media display are controlled by a control system. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media display are operatively coupled to a network. In some embodiments, the method further comprises extending a first pin from the first media display, extending a second pin from the second media display, and engaging the retaining clip with the first pin and the second pin to facilitate (i) aligning the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or (ii) retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media display and the second media display over time and/or during operation. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including coupling the retaining clip to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm extending in a first direction across a window and secured to a window framing system, (ii) a second arm extending in a second direction, generally normal to the first direction, which second arm extends across the media display matrix and is configured to secure the media display to the window framing system, and (iii) a joint securing the first arm to the second arm and removably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portion that is disposed between the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises (i) aligning the first media display with the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane by operatively engaging a first leg of the retaining clip to a first side of the first media display opposing the first end and a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, and (ii) mounting the retaining clip to the joint by operatively engaging a second leg, generally extending normal to the first leg, to the joint. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including, upon operatively engaging the second leg, allowing minimal movement, or preventing movement, of the first media display relative to the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises disposing a semi-permeable material (a) between the first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays, and/or (b) between the second arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays. In some embodiments, the method further comprises filing a gap between (i) the first arm and the first media display, (ii) the first arm and the second media display, (iii) the second arm and the first media display and/or (iv) the second arm and the second media display, with the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the method further comprises compressing the semi-permeable material to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments, the method further comprises flowing air through the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the method further comprises upon engaging the retaining clip, engaging and cradling a first pin of the first media display and a second pin of the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises protruding the first pin from a first framing of the first media display and/or protruding the second pin from a second framing of the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the retaining clip (i) mounting to the first media display, to the second media display, to a third media display, and to a fourth media display, (ii) facilitating alignment of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display and the further media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (iii) retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display and the fourth media display during engagement of retaining clip with the first media display, the second media display, the third media display and the further media display, and (iv) being disposed adjacent to the first end of the first media display, to the second end of the second media display, to a third end of the third media display and to a fourth end of the fourth media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the third media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the fourth media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the first media display, in the matrix of media displays. In some embodiments, the retaining clip comprises a first leg extending from a retaining clip center, a second leg extending from the retaining clip center in a lateral direction opposite to that of the first leg and a third leg extending generally normal from the first leg, the method further comprising (i) aligning the first media display with the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane by coupling the first media display to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end and coupling the second media display to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, (ii) aligning the third media display with the fourth media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane by coupling the third media display to the second leg on a third side of the third media display opposing a third end of the third media display and coupling the fourth media display to the second leg of a fourth side of the fourth media display opposing a fourth end of the fourth media display, and (iii) facilitating mounting the retaining clip with the third leg. In some embodiments, the method further comprises allowing minimal movement, or preventing movement, of the first media display relative to the second media display upon engagement of the first leg, and/or allowing minimal movement, or preventing movement, of the third media display relative to the fourth media display upon engagement of the second leg. In some embodiments, the method further comprises engaging and cradling a first pin of the first media display, a second pin of the second media display, a third pin of the third media display and a fourth pin of the fourth media display, upon engagement of the retaining clip. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including (i) protruding the first pin from a first framing of the first media display, (ii) protruding the second pin from a second framing of the second media display, (iii) protruding the third pin from a third framing of the third media display, and/or (iv) protruding the fourth pin from a fourth framing of the fourth media display. In some embodiments, the first arm is generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the first arm and the second arm are each generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature and/or the second leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, operatively engaging the retaining clip to a boss of the joint, removably securing the retaining clip to the joint. In some embodiments, the method further comprises extending a fastener through the retaining clip and selectively secure the retaining clip to the joint. In some embodiments, the interior framing portion includes a stiffener flange extending from the boss along at least a portion of the joint. In some embodiments, the method further comprises extending a first pin from the first media display and extending a second pin from the second media display, operatively engaging the first pin and the second pin with the retaining clip, facilitating alignment of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and retaining, or substantially retaining, the relative positions of the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises extending a fastener through the retaining clip and selectively securing the retaining clip to a window framing system with the fastener. In some embodiments, the method further comprises (i) coupling the retaining clip to an interior framing portion that includes a first arm that extends across a window and is secured to a window framing system, wherein the first arm comprising a curvature with upstanding flanges, and (ii) disposing a semi-permeable material between the first arm and the first media display, the second media display or both the first and second media displays. In some embodiments, filling a gap between the first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display, or (iii) both the first media display and the second media display, with the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the method further comprises compressing the semi-permeable material to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments, the method further comprises mounting the semi-permeable material between the upstanding flanges. In some embodiments, the method further comprises flowing air through the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including operatively engaging the retaining clip with a boss that is a portion of the interior framing portion to removably secure the retaining clip to the window framing system.

In some embodiments, the network is a local network. In some embodiments, the network comprises a cable configured to transmit power and communication in a single cable. The communication can be one or more types of communication. The communication can comprise cellular communication abiding by at least a second generation (2G), third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, the communication comprises media communication facilitating stills, music, or moving picture streams (e.g., movies or videos). In some embodiments, the communication comprises data communication (e.g., sensor data). In some embodiments, the communication comprises control communication, e.g., to control the one or more nodes operatively coupled to the networks. In some embodiments, the network comprises a first (e.g., cabling) network installed in the facility. In some embodiments, the network comprises a (e.g., cabling) network installed in an envelope of the facility (e.g., in an envelope of a building included in the facility).

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides systems, apparatuses (e.g., controllers), and/or non-transitory computer-readable medium or media (e.g., software) that implement any of the methods disclosed herein.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides methods that use any of the systems, computer readable media, and/or apparatuses disclosed herein, e.g., for their intended purpose.

In another aspect, an apparatus comprises at least one controller that is programmed to direct a mechanism used to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of the method disclosed herein, which at least one controller is configured to operatively couple to the mechanism. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the method) are directed/executed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different controllers.

In another aspect, an apparatus comprises at least one controller that is configured (e.g., programmed) to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of the methods disclosed herein. The at least one controller may implement any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the method) are directed/executed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different controllers.

In some embodiments, one controller of the at least one controller is configured to perform two or more operations. In some embodiments, two different controllers of the at least one controller are configured to each perform a different operation.

In another aspect, a system comprises at least one controller that is programmed to direct operation of at least one another apparatus (or component thereof), and the apparatus (or component thereof), wherein the at least one controller is operatively coupled to the apparatus (or to the component thereof). The apparatus (or component thereof) may include any apparatus (or component thereof) disclosed herein. The at least one controller may be configured to direct any apparatus (or component thereof) disclosed herein. The at least one controller may be configured to operatively couple to any apparatus (or component thereof) disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the apparatus) are directed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed by different controllers.

In another aspect, a computer software product (e.g., inscribed on one or more non-transitory medium) in which program instructions are stored, which instructions, when read by at least one processor (e.g., computer), cause the at least one processor to direct a mechanism disclosed herein to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of the method disclosed herein, wherein the at least one processor is configured to operatively couple to the mechanism. The mechanism can comprise any apparatus (or any component thereof) disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the apparatus) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer-readable program instructions (e.g., included in a program product comprising one or more non-transitory medium) comprising machine-executable code that, upon execution by one or more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the method) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer-readable medium or media comprising machine-executable code that, upon execution by one or more processors, effectuates directions of the controller(s) (e.g., as disclosed herein). In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the controller) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a computer system comprising one or more computer processors and a non-transitory computer-readable medium or media coupled thereto. The non-transitory computer-readable medium comprises machine-executable code that, upon execution by the one or more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein and/or effectuates directions of the controller(s) disclosed herein.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer readable program instructions that, when read by one or more processors, causes the one or more processors to execute any operation of the methods disclosed herein, any operation performed (or configured to be performed) by the apparatuses disclosed herein, and/or any operation directed (or configured to be directed) by the apparatuses disclosed herein.

In some embodiments, the program instructions are inscribed in a non-transitory computer readable medium or media. In some embodiments, at least two of the operations are executed by one of the one or more processors. In some embodiments, at least two of the operations are each executed by different processors of the one or more processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides networks that are configured for transmission of any communication (e.g., signal) and/or (e.g., electrical) power facilitating any of the operations disclosed herein. The communication may comprise control communication, cellular communication, media communication, and/or data communication. The data communication may comprise sensor data communication and/or processed data communication. The networks may be configured to abide by one or more protocols facilitating such communication. For example, a communications protocol used by the network (e.g., with a BMS) can be a building automation and control networks protocol (BACnet). For example, a communication protocol may facilitate cellular communication abiding by at least a 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th generation cellular communication protocol.

The content of this summary section is provided as a simplified introduction to the disclosure and is not intended to be used to limit the scope of any invention disclosed herein or the scope of the appended claims.

Additional aspects and advantages of the present disclosure will become readily apparent to those skilled in this art from the following detailed description, wherein only illustrative embodiments of the present disclosure are shown and described. As will be realized, the present disclosure is capable of other and different embodiments, and its several details are capable of modifications in various obvious respects, all without departing from the disclosure. Accordingly, the drawings and description are to be regarded as illustrative in nature, and not as restrictive.

These and other features and embodiments will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

All publications, patents, and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent, or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention will be obtained by reference to the following detailed description that sets forth illustrative embodiments, in which the principles of the invention are utilized, and the accompanying drawings or figures (also “Fig.” and “Figs.” herein), of which:

FIGS. 1A-1B show various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 2 schematically shows a display construct assembly;

FIG. 3 schematically shows a display construct assembly;

FIG. 4 schematically shows a hinge;

FIG. 5 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct assemblies;

FIG. 6 schematically various fasteners, display construct assemblies, and wiring;

FIG. 7 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct assemblies;

FIG. 8 schematically shows various views of a display construct assembly and applicator;

FIG. 9 schematically shows various views of a display construct assembly;

FIG. 10 schematically shows various fasteners options and display construct assemblies;

FIG. 11 schematically various operations in display construct assembly formation;

FIG. 12 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct assemblies;

FIG. 13 schematically shows various layers in an electrochromic construct;

FIGS. 14A-B schematically show various views of integrated glass units;

FIG. 15 schematically shows a control hierarchy scheme and a building;

FIG. 16 schematically shows a processing system;

FIG. 17 schematically shows a display construct assembly and a controller and power supply assembly;

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of an operating method for a display construct;

FIG. 19 s a flow chart showing an example of an operating method for a display construct;

FIG. 20 schematically shows a control scheme for display constructs;

FIGS. 21A-B schematically show various windows and display constructs;

FIGS. 22A-B schematically show various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 23 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 24 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 25 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 26 schematically shows a disassembled (e.g., exploded) view of a box comprising circuitry;

FIGS. 27A-B schematically show various views of a box comprising circuitry;

FIG. 28 schematically shows a display construct and associated components;

FIGS. 29A-D schematically show various display constructs;

FIGS. 30A-B schematically show various display constructs;

FIGS. 31A-B schematically show various display constructs;

FIG. 32 schematically shows a disassembled (e.g., exploded view) of a box comprising circuitry;

FIGS. 33A-D schematically show various views of a box comprising circuitry;

FIGS. 34A-E schematically show various views of a box comprising circuitry;

FIG. 35 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof).;

FIG. 36 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 37 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 38 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 39 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 40 schematically show various views of portions of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 41 schematically show various views of a display constructs and associated components (e.g., portions thereof);

FIG. 42 schematically show various views of portion of a display constructs and associated components;

FIG. 43 schematically show various views of portions of a fastener and associated components;

FIG. 44 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;

FIG. 45 schematically shows perspective views of internal framing portions and a retaining clip;

FIG. 46 schematically shows a perspective view of internal framing portions and a retaining clip;

FIG. 47 schematically shows perspective views of a pin and a media display portion;

FIG. 48 schematically shows perspective views of a portion of media displays, internal framing portions and a retaining clip;

FIG. 49 schematically shows perspective views of internal framing portions;

FIG. 50 schematically shows a perspective view of a portion of a media display, internal framing portions and a retaining clip;

FIG. 51 is a flow chart;

FIG. 52 is a flow chart;

FIGS. 53A and 53B schematically show a perspective view of a portion of a media display, internal framing portions and a retaining clip;

FIGS. 54A-B schematically show various perspective views of media display portions, internal framing portions and retaining clips; and

FIGS. 55A-B shows various portions of a display construct and associated components.

The figures and components therein may not be drawn to scale. Various components of the figures described herein may not be drawn to scale.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

While various embodiments of the invention have been shown, and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions may occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein might be employed.

Terms such as “a,” “an,” and “the” are not intended to refer to only a singular entity but include the general class of which a specific example may be used for illustration. The terminology herein is used to describe specific embodiments of the invention(s), but their usage does not delimit the invention(s).

When ranges are mentioned, the ranges are meant to be inclusive, unless otherwise specified. For example, a range between value 1 and value 2 is meant to be inclusive and include value 1 and value 2. The inclusive range will span any value from about value 1 to about value 2. The term “adjacent” or “adjacent to,” as used herein, includes “next to,” “adjoining,” “in contact with,” and “in proximity to.”

The term “operatively coupled” or “operatively connected” refers to a first element (e.g., mechanism) that is coupled (e.g., connected) to a second element, to allow the intended operation of the second and/or first element. The coupling may comprise physical or non-physical coupling. The non-physical coupling may comprise signal-induced coupling (e.g., wireless coupling). Coupled can include physical coupling (e.g., physically connected), or non-physical coupling (e.g., via wireless communication).

An element (e.g., mechanism) that is “configured to” perform a function includes a structural feature that causes the element to perform this function. A structural feature may include an electrical feature, such as a circuitry or a circuit element. A structural feature may include a circuitry (e.g., comprising electrical or optical circuitry). Electrical circuitry may comprise one or more wires. Optical circuitry may comprise at least one optical element (e.g., beam splitter, mirror, lens and/or optical fiber). A structural feature may include a mechanical feature. A mechanical feature may comprise a latch, a spring, a closure, a hinge, a chassis, a support, a fastener, or a cantilever, and so forth. Performing the function may comprise utilizing a logical feature. A logical feature may include programming instructions. Programming instructions may be executable by at least one processor. Programming instructions may be stored or encoded on a (e.g., non-transitory) medium accessible by one or more processors. Additionally, in the following description, the phrases “operable to,” “adapted to,” “configured to,” “designed to,” “programmed to,” or “capable of” may be used interchangeably where appropriate.

As used herein, including the claims, the conjunction “and/or” in a phrase such as “including X, Y, and/or Z”, refers to in inclusion of any combination or plurality of X, Y, and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y and a plurality of Zs. The conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “X, Y, Z, or any combination or plurality thereof.” The conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “one or more X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof.” The conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “at least one X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof.”

In some embodiments, a display construct that is coupled with a viewing (e.g., a tintable viewing) window. The viewing window may include an integrated glass unit. The display construct may include one or more glass panes. The display (e.g., display matrix) may comprise a light emitting diode (LED). The LED may comprise an organic material (e.g., organic light emitting diode abbreviated herein as “OLED”). The OLED may comprise a transparent organic light emitting diode display (abbreviated herein as “TOLED”), which TOLED is at least partially transparent. The display may have at its fundamental length scale 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, or 8000 pixels. The display may have at its fundamental length scale any number of pixels between the aforementioned number of pixels (e.g., from about 2000 pixels to about 4000 pixels, from about 4000 pixels to about 8000 pixels, or from about 2000 pixels to about 8000 pixels). A fundamental length scale may comprise a diameter of a bounding circle, a length, a width, or a height. The fundamental length scale may be abbreviated herein as “FLS.” The display construct may comprise a high resolution display. For example, the display construct may have a resolution of at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1920, 1280, 2160, 3840, 4096, 4320, or 7680 pixels, by at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1280, 1920, 2160, 3840, 4096, 4320, or 7680 pixels (at 30 Hz or at 60 Hz). The first number of pixels may designate the height of the display and the second pixels may designates the length of the display. For example, the display may be a high resolution display having a resolution of 1920×1080, 3840×2160, 4096×2160, or 7680×4320. The display may be a standard definition display, enhanced definition display, high definition display, or an ultra-high definition display. The display may be rectangular. The image projected by the display matrix may be refreshed at a frequency (e.g., at a refresh rate) of at least about 20 Hz, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, or 120 Hertz (Hz). The FLS of the display construct may be at least 20″, 25″, 30″, 35″, 40″, 45″, 50″, 55″, 60″, 65″, 80″, or 90 inches (″). The FLS of the display construct can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 20″ to about 55″, from about 55″ to about 100″, or from about 20″ to about 100″).

In some embodiments, at least a portion of a window surface in a facility is utilized to display the various media using the glass display construct. The display may be utilized for (e.g., at least partial) viewing an environment external to the window (e.g., outdoor environment), e.g., when the display is not operating. The display may be used to display media (e.g., as disclosed herein), to augment the external view with (e.g., optical) overlays, augmented reality, and/or lighting (e.g., the display may act as a light source). The media may be used for entertainment and non-entertainment purposes. The media may be used for work (e.g., data analysis, drafting, and/or video conferencing). The media may be manipulated (e.g., by utilizing the display construct). Utilizing the display construct can be direct or indirect. Indirect utilization of the media may be using an input device such as an electronic mouse, or a keyboard. The input device may be communicatively (e.g., wired and/or wirelessly) coupled to the media. Direct utilization may be by using the display construct as a touch screen using a user (e.g., finger) or a directing device (e.g., an electronic pen or stylus). The directing device may be made or, and/or coated with a low abrasive material (e.g., a polymer). The low abrasive material may be configured to facilitate (e.g., repeatedly) contacting the display construct with minimal damage (e.g., scratching) to the display construct. the low abrasive material may comprise a polymer or resin (e.g., plastic). The directing device may be passive or active. The active directing device may operatively couple to the display construct and/or network. The active directing device may comprise a circuitry. The active directing device may comprise a remote controller. The directing device may facilitate direction of operations related to media presented by the display construct. The directing device may facilitate (e.g., real time and/or in situ) interaction with the media presented by the display construct.

Embodiments described herein relate to vision windows with a tandem (e.g., transparent) display construct. In certain embodiments, the vision window is an electrochromic window. The electrochromic window may comprise a solid state and/or inorganic electrochromic (EC) device. The vision window may be in the form of an integrated glass unit (IGU). When the IGU includes an electrochromic (abbreviated herein as “EC”) device, it may be termed an “EC IGU.” The EC IGU can tint (e.g., darken) a room in which it is disposed and/or provide a tinted (e.g., darker) background as compared to a non-tinted IGU. The tinted IGU can provide a background preferable (e.g., necessary) for acceptable (e.g., good) contrast on the (e.g., transparent) display construct. In another example, windows with (e.g., transparent) display constructs can replace televisions (abbreviated herein as “TVs”) in commercial and residential applications. Together, the (e.g., transparent) display construct and EC IGU can provide visual privacy glass function, e.g., because the display can augment the privacy provided by EC glass alone. Embodiments disclosed herein also describe particular methods, apparatus and systems for mounting display constructs (e.g., transparent display) to framing systems of vision windows.

In various embodiments, a network infrastructure supports a control system for one or more windows such as tintable (e.g., electrochromic) windows. The control system may comprise one or more controllers operatively coupled (e.g., directly or indirectly) to one or more windows. While the disclosed embodiments describe tintable windows (also referred to herein as “optically switchable windows,” or “smart windows”) such as electrochromic windows, the concepts disclosed herein may apply to other types of switchable optical devices comprising a liquid crystal device, an electrochromic device, suspended particle device (SPD), NanoChromics display (NCD), Organic electroluminescent display (OELD), suspended particle device (SPD), NanoChromics display (NCD), or an Organic electroluminescent display (OELD). The display element may be attached to a part of a transparent body (such as the windows). The tintable window may be disposed in a (non-transitory) facility such as a building, and/or in a transitory facility (e.g., vehicle) such as a car, RV, bus, train, airplane, helicopter, ship, or boat.

In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (e.g., controllable and/or reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, e.g., when a stimulus is applied. The change may be a continuous change. A change may be to discrete tint levels (e.g., to at least about 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 tint levels). The optical property may comprise hue, or transmissivity. The hue may comprise color. The transmissivity may be of one or more wavelengths. The wavelengths may comprise ultraviolet, visible, or infrared wavelengths. The stimulus can include an optical, electrical and/or magnetic stimulus. For example, the stimulus can include an applied voltage and/or current. One or more tintable windows can be used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through them. One or more tintable windows can be used to control a temperature within a building, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through the window. Control of the solar energy may control heat load imposed on the interior of the facility (e.g., building). The control may be manual and/or automatic. The control may be used for maintaining one or more requested (e.g., environmental) conditions, e.g., occupant comfort. The control may include reducing energy consumption of a heating, ventilation, air conditioning and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by one system. The heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as “HVAC”). In some cases, tintable windows may be responsive to (e.g., and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental sensors and/or user control. Tintable windows may comprise (e.g., may be) electrochromic windows. The windows may be located in the range from the interior to the exterior of a structure (e.g., facility, e.g., building). However, this need not be the case. Tintable windows may operate using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices, microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices (such as microshutters), or any technology known now, or later developed, that is configured to control light transmission through a window. Windows (e.g., with MEMS devices for tinting) are described in U.S. Pat. No. 10,359,681, issued Jul. 23, 2019, filed May 15, 2015, titled “MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES,” and incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more tintable windows can be located within the interior of a building, e.g., between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases, one or more tintable windows can be used in automobiles, trains, aircraft, and other vehicles, e.g., in lieu of a passive and/or non-tinting window.

In some embodiments, a plurality of devices may be operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled to the control system. The devices may include a window (e.g., tintable window), a sensor, an emitter, or a transceiver. The plurality of devices may be disposed in a facility (e.g., including a building and/or room). The control system may comprise the hierarchy of controllers. The devices may comprise an emitter, a sensor, ora window (e.g., IGU). The device may be any device as disclosed herein. At least two of the plurality of devices may be of the same type. For example, two or more IGUs may be coupled to the control system. At least two of the plurality of devices may be of different types. For example, a sensor and an emitter may be coupled to the control system. At times the plurality of devices may comprise at least 20, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, 50000, 100000, or 500000 devices. The plurality of devices may be of any number between the aforementioned numbers (e.g., from 20 devices to 500000 devices, from 20 devices to 50 devices, from 50 devices to 500 devices, from 500 devices to 2500 devices, from 1000 devices to 5000 devices, from 5000 devices to 10000 devices, from 10000 devices to 100000 devices, or from 100000 devices to 500000 devices). For example, the number of windows in a floor may be at least 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, or 50. The number of windows in a floor can be any number between the aforementioned numbers (e.g., from 5 to 50, from 5 to 25, or from 25 to 50). At times the devices may be in a multi-story building. At least a portion of the floors of the multi-story building may have devices controlled by the control system (e.g., at least a portion of the floors of the multi-story building may be controlled by the control system). For example, the multi-story building may have at least 2, 8, 10, 25, 50, 80, 100, 120, 140, or 160 floors that are controlled by the control system. The number of floors (e.g., devices therein) controlled by the control system may be any number between the aforementioned numbers (e.g., from 2 to 50, from 25 to 100, or from 80 to 160). The floor may be of an area of at least about 150 m², 250 m², 500 m², 1000 m², 1500 m², or 2000 square meters (m²). The floor may have an area between any of the aforementioned floor area values (e.g., from about 150 m² to about 2000 m², from about 150 m² to about 500 m², from about 250 m² to about 1000 m², or from about 1000 m² to about 2000 m²). The building may comprise an area of at least about 1000 square feet (sqft), 2000 sqft, 5000 sqft, 10000 sqft, 100000 sqft, 150000 sqft, 200000 sqft, or 500000 sqft. The building may comprise an area between any of the above mentioned areas (e.g., from about 1000 sqft to about 5000 sqft, from about 5000 sqft to about 500000 sqft, or from about 1000 sqft to about 500000 sqft). The building may comprise an area of at least about 100 m², 200 m², 500 m², 1000 m², 5000 m², 10000 m², 25000 m², or 50000 m². The building may comprise an area between any of the above mentioned areas (e.g., from about 100 m² to about 1000 m², from about 500 m² to about 25000 m², from about 100 m² to about 50000 m²). The facility may comprise a commercial or a residential building. The commercial building may include tenant(s) and/or owner(s). The residential facility may comprise a multi or a single family building. The residential facility may comprise an apartment complex. The residential facility may comprise a single family home. The residential facility may comprise multifamily homes (e.g., apartments). The residential facility may comprise townhouses. The facility may comprise residential and commercial portions. The facility may comprise at least about 1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 420, 450, 500, or 550 windows (e.g., tintable windows). The windows may be divided into zones (e.g., based at least in part on the location, façade, floor, ownership, utilization of the enclosure (e.g., room) in which they are disposed, any other assignment metric, random assignment, or any combination thereof. Allocation of windows to the zone may be static or dynamic (e.g., based on a heuristic). There may be at least about 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 30, 40, or 46 windows per zone.

FIG. 1A shows an example of a window 102 framed in a window frame 103 (partial view shown), and a fastener structure 104 comprising a first hinge 105 a and a second hinge 105 b, which hinges facilitate rotating display construct 101 about the hinge axis, e.g., in a direction of arrow 111. The window may be an electrochromic window. The window may be in the form of an EC IGU. In one embodiment, mounted to window frame (e.g., 103) is one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent display) (e.g., 101) that is transparent at least in part. In one embodiment, the one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent display) comprises T-OLED technology, but it should be understood that the present invention should not be limited by or to such technology. In one embodiment, one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent display) is mounted to frame (e.g., 103) via a fastener structure (e.g., 104). In one embodiment the fastener structure (also referred to herein as a “fastener”) comprises a bracket. In one embodiment, the fastener structure comprises an L-bracket. In one embodiment, L-bracket comprises a length that approximates or equals a length of a side of window (e.g., and in the example shown in FIG. 1A, also the length of the fastener 104). In embodiments, the fundamental length scale (e.g., length) of a window is up to 60 feet (′), 50′, 40′, 30′, 25′, 20′, 15′, 10′, 5′ or 1′. The FLS of the window can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from 1′ to 60′, from 1′ to 30′, from 30′ to 60′, or from 10′ to 40′). In embodiments, the fundamental length scale (e.g., length) of a window is at least about 50′, 60′, 80′, or 100′. In one embodiment, the display construct (e.g., transparent display) encompasses an area that (e.g., substantially) matches a surface area of the lite (e.g., pane). The fastener structure may be mounted to the structure (e.g., frame portion such as a mullion) via a locking mechanism (e.g., snap fit lock) and/or via screw(s), e.g., may be configured for a slip and snap attachment. the fastener may comprise a mounting plate. The fastener may be configured to allow its associated cabling and/or wiring to reside in the supporting structure cavity (e.g., framing portion) without exerting pressure on the supporting structure (e.g., fixture). The supporting structure may comprise a clip (e.g., spring clip) to hold the fastener in place.

In particular embodiments, the area of the display approximates the vision area of a window (e.g., the area within the framing system of the window (e.g., see 1 in FIG. 1B)). In one embodiment, one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent display), together, (e.g., approximately and/or substantially) cover the vision area of a window (e.g., see 2 and 3 in FIG. 1 b ). In one embodiment, a transparent display encompasses an area that is about half of the vision area of a (e.g., tintable) window. In one embodiment, two or more displays are mounted over a single vision window (see 2 and 3 in FIG. 1 b ). The display construct can cover at least a portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. The display construct can cover at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. The area occupied by the display construct can be the entire (100%) of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. The area occupied by the display construct can be any percentage of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window between the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 10% to about 100%, from about 10% to about 50%, or from about 50% to about 100%). At times a plurality of display constructs can cover the (e.g., tintable) window. The display construct can be mounted in one or more layouts and/or configurations, e.g., to maximize design flexibility. A plurality of fasteners can be coupled (e.g., respectively) to the plurality of display constructs (e.g., to allow swiveling of the display constructs). FIG. 1B shows an example of various windows in a facade 120 of a building, which facade comprises windows 122, 123, and 121, and display constructs 1, 2, and 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1B, display construct 1 is transparent at least in part and is disposed over window 123 (e.g., display construct 1 is super positioned over window 123) such that the entirety of window 123 is covered by the display construct, and a user can view through the display construct 1 and the window 123 the external environment (e.g., flowers, glass, and trees). Display construct 1 is coupled to the window with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display construct about an axis parallel to the window bottom horizontal edge, which rotation is in the direction of arrow 127. In the example shown in FIG. 1B, display constructs 2 and 3 are transparent at least in part and are disposed over window 121 such that the entirety of window 121 is covered by the two display construct each covering (e.g., extending to) about half of the surface area of window 121, and a user can view through the display constructs 2 and 3 and the window 121 the external environment (e.g., flowers, glass, and trees). Display construct 2 is coupled to the window 121 with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display construct about an axis parallel to the window left vertical edge, which rotation is in the direction of arrow 126. Display construct 3 is coupled to the window with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display construct about an axis parallel to the window 121 right vertical edge, which rotation is in the direction of arrow 125.

In some embodiments, the display construct is coupled to a structure (e.g., a fixture). The structure may comprise a window, a wall, or a board. The display construct may be coupled to the structure with a fastener. There may be a distance between the display construct and the structure, e.g., when the display construct is operational. The distance may be at most about 0.5 meters (m), 0.4 m, 0.3 m, 0.2 m, 0.1 m, 0.05 m, 0.025 m, or 0.01 m.

In some embodiments, the E-box is operatively coupled to, or includes, a power supply. The power supply can be an electrical device that supplies electric power to an electrical load. The power supply can convert electric current from a source to the correct voltage, current, and/or frequency to power the load. The power supply may limit the current drawn by the load to safe levels (e.g., according to jurisdictional and/or safety standards), shut off the current (e.g., in the event of an electrical fault), condition power (e.g., to prevent electronic noise and/or voltage surges on the input from reaching the load), correct power-factor, and/or store energy (e.g., to facilitate continued operation of the load in the event of a temporary interruption in the source power). The load may be the media display (e.g., OLED display). The power supply may be an electric power converter. The power supply can be a separate standalone device. The power supply can be included in the E-box. The standalone power supply device can be disposed in a structure such as a fixture. The structure can comprise a window frame portion (e.g., mullion or transom), or a wall. The power supply device can be disposed at a distance from the E-box and/or timing controller. The distance may be at least about 30 feet (′), 50′, 100′, 200′, 300′. The E-box may or may not be part of the fastener (e.g., attached to the fastener). In some embodiments, the E-box (e.g., including any analogue to digital converter) may be disposed at a distance from the fastener (e.g., not be part of the fastener).

In some embodiments, housing of an electronic component (e.g., circuitry) comprises at least one heat exchanger. For example, the E-box, power supply housing, and/or timing controller housing (e.g., fastener) may comprise one or more heat exchangers (e.g., as disclosed herein). The heat exchangers may be fans. The heat exchangers may be passive or active. The heat exchangers may comprise a heat pipe. The heat exchangers may comprise a component configured to efficiently absorb and/or transfer heat. For example, the heat exchanger may comprise a metal slab (e.g., heat sink). The metal slap may comprise elemental metal or metal alloy.

In some embodiments, the housing of an electronic component (e.g., fastener) may comprise one or more fans. The fans may direct gas (e.g., air) from one of its sides to the other (e.g., pushing gas into the ambient environment or puling gas out of the ambient environment). The direction of the fan rotation may determine its pushing/pulling gas functionality. The fan may have a fundamental length scale (e.g., height, length, width, radius, or radius of a bounding circle). The fundamental length scale (FLS) of the fan may be at most about 5 centimeters (cm), 4 cm, 3 cm, 2.5 cm, 2 cm, 1.5 cm, 1 cm, or 0.5 cm. The FLS may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5 cm to about 0.5 cm, from about 5 cm to about 2 cm, or from about 2 cm to about 0.5 cm). The height and the length of the fan may be (e.g., substantially) equal. The width of the fan may be at most about half, third, fourth, or fifth of the height and/or length of the fan. The fan may have a plurality of blades (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 blades). In some embodiments, the fan may be bladeless. The fan may require low voltage, e.g., of at most about 1.5 volts (V), 2V, 3V, 4V, 5V, 6V, 7V, 8V, 9V, or 10V. The speed of the fan may be at least about 5 thousand revolutions per minutes (KRPM), 5.5 KRPM, 6 KRPM, 6.5 KRPM, 7 KRPM, 7.5 KRPM, 8 KRPM, 8.5 KRPM, 9 KRPM, 9.5 KRPM, 10 KRPM, 10.5 KRPM, 11 KRPM, 11.5 KRPM, or 12 KRPM. The fan may have a low noise signature. The low noise signature may be of at most about 10.0 decibels (dbA), 15 dbA, 20, 25 dbA, or 30 dbA, wherein dbA values are adjusted for varying sensitivity of a human ear to different frequencies of sound. The low noise signature may be below a speaking sound (e.g., of about 65 dbA). The low noise signature may be at most in the order of a breathing noise (e.g., of about 10 dbA), of a silent study room (e.g., of about 20 dbA), of a soft whisper (e.g., of about 40 dbA), or of an office environment (e.g., from about 50 dbA to about 65 dbA). The noise level of the fan may abide by jurisdictional standards, e.g., by standards promulgated by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). The fan may have a weight of at most about 5 grams (g), 6 g, 8 g, or 10 g. The fan may have a conduction capacity of air of at least about 0.02 cubic meters per minute (M³/min), 0.03 M³/min, 0.04 M³/min, 0.05 M³/min, 0.06 M³/min, 0.07 M³/min, 0.08 M³/min, 0.09 M³/min, 0.1 M³/min, 0.15 M³/min, 0.2 M³/min, 0.3 M³/min, 0.4 M³/min, or 0.5 M³/min. The fan may have a conduction capacity between any of the conduction capacities mentioned herein (e.g., from about 0.02 M³/min to about 0.05 M³/min, from about 0.05 M³/min to about 0.1 M³/min, or from about 0.1 M³/min to about 0.5 M³/min).

In some embodiments, at least two of the plurality of circuit boards may be disposed in a manner that facilitates shielding, heat exchange and/or cooling element disposed therebetween. At least one shielding element may be disposed between a first circuit board and a second circuit board that are located (e.g., directly) adjacent to each other. The shielding element may comprise electrical and/or electromagnetic (e.g., radio frequency) shielding. The shielding may or may not act as a heat exchanger and/or cooling element. The housing of an electronic component may comprise a heat exchanger and/or cooling element that is separate from the shielding. The heat exchanger and/or cooling element may comprise a heat pipe, or a metallic slab. Metallic may comprise elemental metal or metal alloy. The metal may be configured for (e.g., efficient and/or rapid) heat conduction. The metal may comprise copper, aluminum, brass, steel, or bronze. The cooling element may comprise a fluid, gaseous, or semisolid (e.g., gel) material. The cooling element may be active and/or passive. The cooling element may comprise a circulating substance. The cooling element may be operatively coupled to an active cooling device (e.g., thermostat, cooler, and/or refrigerator). The active cooling device may be disposed externally to the device ensemble housing. The cooling element may be disposed in a fixture (e.g., the floor, ceiling, wall, or framing) of the enclosure (e.g., building or room) in which the housing of an electronic component is disposed. The fixture may comprise a mullion or transom.

In some embodiments, the display construct assembly can accept one or more connector types for media signal and/or electricity. For example, at least one connector and/or socket to one or more drivers and/or receivers, e.g., for use in serial communications systems (e.g., RS485 (input and output)). The communication may be bidirectional. The connector and/or socket may comprise connector to optical cable(s). The connector and/or socket types may comprise HDMI, display port (DP) input and/or output or alternating current (AC) input and/or switch. FIG. 17 shows an example of a side of a controller and power supply assembly 1700 that includes HDMI input 1701, DP1 input 1702, RS485 input 1703, AC switch and AC input 1704, RS485 output 1705, and DP output 1706. FIG. 17 shows a perspective disassembled (e.g., exploded) view of a controller and power supply assembly 1710 connected to a main power line 1711, a window controller 1712, an IGU 1715, framing cap 1718 (sometimes referred to as “beauty cap”), window frame 1719, circuitry 1716 (e.g., comprising a booster and/or driver for the display matrix), hinges (e.g., hinge 1717), display construct 1714, cover 1720, and a display construct frame (e.g., edge bezel) 1713 for the display construct. The display construct frame can be a cover for the touch screen component(s). The window controller may be disposed to the side of the window, closer or further from the window. The window controller may be disposed in (or on) the window frame, in (or on) a wall, in (or on) a ceiling, in (or on) a floor. The hinge may or may not be temporarily locked (e.g., using insertions (e.g., slits or crevices), protrusions, and/or spring (e.g., spring plunger)).

In some embodiments, the display construct is registered with a viewing window (e.g., Integrated glass unit abbreviated herein as “IGU”). The display construct may be configured to be positioned on at least a portion of a (e.g., tintable) window. For example, the display construct may be configured to be super positioned with at least a portion of the window. The display construct may be configured to facilitate simultaneous viewing from one side of a window (e.g., internal environment) to its opposing side (e.g., external environment). The display construct may be position in the light of sight of a user viewing through a window (or any portion thereof).

In some embodiments, a controller is operatively coupled (e.g., communicatively coupled) with the display construct. The communication may be wired and/or wireless. The controller may control the display construct at least partially automatically. The controller may be a timing controller (e.g., T-CON), e.g., as disclosed herein. The control may include electronic and/or optical control. The controller may comprise a microcontroller. The controller may be disposed adjacent to the glass (e.g., IGU) and/or display construct. The controller may be disposed in a window frame (e.g., transom or mullion). In some embodiments, a mullion (e.g., FIG. 1B, 131 ) is a vertical run of window framing, and a transom (e.g., FIG. 1B, 130 ) is a horizontal run of window framing. The window frame may (e.g., directly or indirectly) hold the glass and/or display construct. The glass may be a tintable glass. The tintable glass may be controlled (e.g., using at least one controller). For example, the tintable glass may be controlled by a hierarchy of controllers (e.g., see FIG. 15 ). The hierarchy of controllers may be static or dynamic (e.g., in which the hierarchical designation of controllers is dynamically altered). The one or more controllers that control the viewing (e.g., tintable) window may or may not control the display construct (also referred to herein as “media display construct”).

In some embodiments, the display construct comprises glass. The glass may be in the form of one or more glass pane. For example, the display construct may include a display matrix (e.g., an array of lights) disposed between two glass panes. The array of lights may include an array of colored lights. For example, an array of red, green, and blue colored lights. For example, an array of cyan, magenta, and yellow colored lights. The array of lights may include light colors used in electronic screen display. The array of lights may comprise an array of LEDs (e.g., OLEDs, e.g., TOLEDs). The matrix display (e.g., array of lights) may be at least partially transparent (e.g., to an average human eye). The transparent OLED may facilitate transition of a substantial portion (e.g., greater than about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 80%, 90% or 95%) of the intensity and/or wavelength to which an average human eye senses. The matrix display may form minimal disturbance to a user looking through the array. The array of lights may form minimal disturbance to a user looking through a window on which the array is disposed. The display matrix (e.g., array of lights) may be maximally transparent. At least one glass pane of the display construct may be of a regular glass thickness. The regular glass may have a thickness of at least about 1 millimeters (mm), 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, or 6 mm. The regular glass may have a thickness of a value between any of the aforementioned values (e.g., from 1 mm to 6 mm, from 1 mm to 3 mm, from 3 mm to about 4 mm, or from 4 mm to 6 mm). At least one glass pane of the display construct may be of a thin glass thickness. The thin glass may have a thickness of at most about 0.4 millimeters (mm), 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, or 0.9 mm thick. The thin glass may have a thickness of a value between any of the aforementioned values (e.g., from 0.4 mm to 0.9 mm, from 0.4 mm to 0.7 mm, or from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm). The glass of the display construct may be at least transmissive (e.g., in the visible spectrum). For example, the glass may be at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% transmissive. The glass may have a transmissivity percentage value between any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 80% to about 99%). The display construct may comprise one or more panes (e.g., glass panes). For example, the display construct may comprise a plurality (e.g., two) of panes. The glass panes may have (e.g., substantially) the same thickness, or different thickness. The front facing pane may be thicker than the back facing pane. The back facing pane may be thicker than the front facing pane. Front may be in a direction of a prospective viewer (e.g., in front of display construct 101, looking at display construct 101). Back may be in the direction of a (e.g., tintable) window (e.g., 102). One glass may be thicker relative to another glass. The thicker glass may be at least about 1.25*, 1.5*, 2*, 2.5*, 3*, 3.5*, or 4* thicker than the thinner glass. The symbol “*” designates the mathematical operation of “times.” The transmissivity of the display construct (that including the one or more panes and the display matrix (e.g., light-array or LCD)) may be of at least about 20%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or 90%. The display construct may have a transmissivity percentage value between any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 20% to about 90%, from about 20% to about 50%, from about 20% to about 40%, from about 30% to about 40%, from about 40% to about 80%, or from about 50% to about 90%). A higher transmissivity parentage refers higher intensity and/or broader spectrum of light that passes through a material (e.g., glass). The transmissivity may be of visible light. The transmissivity may be measured as visible transmittance (abbreviated herein as “Tvis”) referring to the amount of light in the visible portion of the spectrum that passes through a material. The transmissivity may be relative to the intensity of incoming light. The display construct may transmit at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible spectrum of light (e.g., wavelength spectrum) therethrough. The display construct may transmit a percentage value between any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 80% to about 99%). In some embodiments, instead of an array of lights, a liquid crystal display is utilized. FIG. 2 shows a schematic example of a display construct assembly 200 prior to its lamination, which display construct includes a thicker supportive structure (e.g., glass pane) 205, a first adhesive layer 204, a display matrix 203, a second adhesive layer 202, and a thinner supportive structure (e.g., glass pane) 201, which matrix is connected via wiring 211 to a circuitry 212 that controls at least an aspect of the display construct, which display construct is coupled to a fastener 213.

The display matrix has reflectance and/or color properties. The display matrix can be colored, gray scale, or black and white. The display matrix may have a color depth. The color depth may be at least about 0.25, 0.5, 1, 1.25, or 1.5 billion colors. The color depth may be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.25 billion colors to about 1.5 billion colors, from about 0.25 billion colors to about 1.25 billion colors, or from about 1 billion colors to about 1.5 billion colors). The display construct may have a contrast ratio of at least about 100000, 120000, 150000, 170000, or 200000, to one. The display construct may have a contrast ratio relative to one between any of the above reference values (e.g., from about 100000:1 to about 200000:1, from about 100000:1 to about 150000:1, or from about 150000:1 to 200000:1). The reflectance of the display construct may be at most about 2%, 4%, 8%, 10%, 14%, or 18%. The reflectance of the display construct may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 2% to about 18%, or from about 2% to about 14%).

In some embodiments, the at least one glass pane of the display construct and/or in the IGU, is strengthened. At least one glass of the display construct and/or IGU may be a native glass (e.g., that did not undergo strengthening and/or tempering process). The glass may be a strengthened glass. The strengthened glass may be heat strengthened, heat tempered, or chemically strengthened. The chemically strengthen glass may be chemically tempered glass. The chemically strengthened glass may include Gorilla glass. The glass may comprise used SentryGlass®. The chemically strengthened glass may comprise one or more ion (e.g., cation) doped glass. The cation may be an alkali (e.g., potassium) or alkali earth cation. The glass may comprise one or more pigments. The glass may allow transition of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The glass may reduce (e.g., prevent) penetration of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The glass may absorb at least part of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light. In some embodiments, the glass may comprise a surface treatment (e.g., sanding).

In some embodiments, the display construct may include a binder (e.g., a laminate and/or adhesive). In some embodiments, the display construct may include a binder that includes a polymer and/or resin. The binder may be disposed between a glass pane and the display matrix. The binder may be chosen to facilitate formation of the construct (e.g., adhesion of the display matrix to the glass pane) with minimally (e.g., without) damaging the display matrix. The binder may be cured by heat and/or UV treatment. The temperature of the heat treatment may be such that minimally damages the display matrix (e.g., not damages the display matrix to a measurable and/or substantial degree). Not damage the array to a substantial degree may refer to not damaging the array to a degree that affects its intended purpose (e.g., performance as a display according to its specification). The binder may include at least one organic polymer. The at least one organic polymer may include Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), Ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA), Polyacrylamide, SGP resin (e.g., SGP 5000 of Dupont). The binder may comprise OCA, e.g., by 3M (e.g., 3M 8211, 3M 8212, 3M 8213, 3M 8214, 3M 8215, 3M 8171, or 3M 8172). The polymer(s) may allow transition of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The polymer may reduce (e.g., prevent) penetration of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The polymer may absorb at least part of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light.

In some embodiments, the display construct comprises lamination. The display construct may comprise a tintable device (e.g., electrochromic device). The tintable device may be laminated onto the display construct (to form a single display construct unit). For example, the display construct may comprise deposited electrochromic layer construct (e.g., deposited on the back side of the media display (e.g., back side of the LEDs). The display construct may comprise one or more layers (e.g., deposited and/or laminated layers) to protect the media display from radiation (e.g., UV and/or IR radiation). The added layering may constitute a film (e.g., electrochromic device, UV protective layering, and/or IR protective layering). The film may be part of the display construct. The film may facilitate longer operational lifetime of the display construct. The film may facilitate greater contrast of the media displayed. The display construct (e.g., including the electrochromic film) may be coupled to a tintable (e.g., electrochromic) window. The film may constitute any tintable window capability (e.g., liquid crystals device, suspended particle device, microelectromechanical system (MEMS) device (such as micro shutters), or any technology configured to control light transmission through a window). The liquid crystal device may comprise a polymer dispersed liquid crystal layer.

In some embodiments, the display construct may comprise a binder in a form of at least one layer. The binder may include at least one optically clear adhesive layer (abbreviated herein as “OCA” layer). For example, the display construct may comprise two binder layers. The binder layers may have a thickness of at least about 0.2 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.4 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.9 mm, or 1 mm. The binder layers may have a thickness of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.2 mm to about 1 mm, from about 0.2 mm to about 0.6 mm, or from about 0.7 to about 1 mm). The binder thickness may be chosen to minimize weight, e.g., while sufficiently binding the construct to form a high tolerance construct that can be machine cut (e.g., have a high die-cut machine tolerance). The binder may increase durability and/or optical characteristics of the display construct, as compared to a display construct devoid the binder. The binder may be (e.g., substantially and/or entirely) transparent (e.g., to the visible light). The binder may be uncolored. The binder may contact the (e.g., largest) surface of the display matrix and the (e.g., largest) surface of a pane (e.g., glass pane), thus binding the display matrix to the pane. The binder may minimally (e.g., not) contribute to an optically and/or visibly distort the displayed media by the display.

In some embodiments, the pane(s), binder, and display matrix are cured before deployment. The curing can be by UV light, moisture, and/or heat. The curing method may be selected to preserve the functionality of the display matrix, and minimize any optical distortion (e.g., maximize transmittance, reduce haze, and/or gas gaps such as air gaps). The binder may increase the durability of the display construct. For example, the binder can reduce the breakage susceptible of the display construct, and/or reduce its flammability. The binder may facilitate adjustment of a refractive index of a pane to ambient air (e.g., where the viewer is), e.g., to (i) minimize loss due to any Fresnel reflection, (ii) transmit all colors with minimal distortion through the display construct, and/or (iii) enhance the image projected by the display construct. The distortion of colors may be due to their passage through the binder, through the glass pane, and to the ambient air. The display construct (e.g., the binder therein) may improve preserve and/or improve an operating temperature range of the display matrix. The binder may prevent one or more gasses and/or debris (e.g., dust or sebaceous) to reach the display matrix. The display construct (e.g., binder, glass, and/or any coating) may prevent physical disturbance to the display matrix (e.g., due to contact). The contact can be direct contact by a user.

In some embodiments, the IGU and/or display construct may comprise a coating (e.g., an anti-reflective coating). The coating may improve optical performance of the glass and/or display construct. The coating may be applied on a glass pane, binder layer, display matrix, and/or electrochromic construct. The coating may be deposited in the form of an anti-reflective, anti-glare, anti-condensation, anti-scratch, anti-smudge treatment, and/or anti-UV, treatment.

In some embodiments, the display construct may comprise a seal. The seal may be disposed between two glasses of the display construct between which the display matrix is disposed. The seal may comprise a polymer/resin (e.g., any polymer/resin disclosed herein). The seal may comprise a carbon based (e.g., organic) polymer or a silicon based polymer. The seal may protect the display construct from light (e.g., UV), humidity, oxygen, physical contact (e.g., physical damage), debris, and/or other environmental components.

In some embodiments, the display construct is durable over a prolonged lifetime. The expected lifetime can be at least about 2 y, 5 y, 10 y, 15 y, 25 y, 50 y, 75 y, or 100 (y) years. The expected lifetime can be any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5 y to about 100 y, from about 2 y to about 25 y, from about 25 y to about 50 y, or from about 50 y to about 100 y). The prolonged lifetime may be at least 20 Kh, 30 Kh, 50 Kh, 100 Kh, 500 Kh, or 1000 Kh (thousand hours). The prolonged lifetime of the display construct may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 20 Kh to about 1000 Kh, from about 20 Kh to about 100 Kh, or from about 100 Kh to about 1000 Kh). The number of hours may refer to the number of hours in which the display construct operates, e.g., for its intended purpose. The lifetime of the display construct may depend on its operating hours and/or any environmental conditions (e.g., UV light, humidity, and/or temperature at its deployed site.

In some embodiments, the display construct is fastened to a fixture (e.g., window frame or wall) that holds the (e.g., tintable) window, e.g., by a fastening mechanism (also referred to herein as a “fastener.”). The fastener may comprise one or more components. For example, the fastener can comprise a bracket, a hinge, a cover. The fastener can be permanent or impermanent. The impermanent fastener may be removed by manual labor and/or automatically. For example, the fastener may comprise one or more screws that fasten it to the window frame. The fastener may comprise a hinge and/or bracket. The hinge may be flexible. The bracket and/or cover (or any portion thereof) may be inflexible or non-flexible. The fastener (e.g., including hinge and/or bracket) may be non-transparent. The fastener (e.g., any of its components) may comprise an elemental metal, metal alloy, an allotrope of elemental carbon, a polymer, or a composite material. At least two components of the fastener can be made of (e.g., substantially) the same type. At least two components of the fastener can be made of different material types. The elemental metal may comprise aluminum. The metal alloy may comprise steel. The fastener may comprise a non-corrosive material. At least a portion of the fastener (e.g., the bracket and/or cover) may be configured to carry the weight of the display construct, e.g., without (e.g., substantial) deformation over its intended lifetime (e.g., as disclosed herein). The display construct may weigh at least about 5 Kg, 10 Kg, 15 Kg, 20 Kg, 25 Kg, 30 Kg, 35 Kg, 40 Kg, or 50 kilograms (Kg). The display construct may weigh any weight between the aforementioned weights (e.g., from 5 Kg to 50 Kg, from 5 Kg to 25 Kg, or from 25 Kg to 50 Kg). FIG. 3 shows an example of a vertical cross section of an assembly 300 (partial view shown) in which a display matrix 311 is disposed between a first pane 312 and a second pane 313 as part of a display construct, and an L shaped bracket 302 disposed between the two glass panes 312 and 313 and coupled to the display construct, which L bracket is coupled to a hinge 303.

In some embodiments, at least a portion of an external surface of the bracket is smooth. In some embodiments, at least a portion of an external surface of the bracket has a shiny or matt texture. Smooth may refer to an external surface having an Ra value of at most 60 micrometers (μm), 40 μm, or 20 μm.

The fastener may be configured for easy install and/or removal of the display construct from the supporting structure (e.g., window frame and/or wall). Removal may be for servicing, replacement, and/or upgrade of any portion of the display construct and/or structure (or any associated device). For example, the fastener may allow (e.g., easy) removal and/or insertion of display construct. For example, the fastener may allow (e.g., easy) removal and/or insertion of a framing portion to which the fastener is attached. For example, the fastener may allow (e.g., easy) removal and/or insertion of a tintable window that is supported by the frame to which the fastener is attached. Easy may refer to low labor cost, low labor grade (e.g., low labor qualification), and/or short labor time. The fastener may be configured to slide and/or lock for installation onto a supporting structure (e.g., a fixture).

In some embodiments, a connecting material is disposed between the display construct and the fastener (e.g., and the bracket and/or cover). The connecting material may comprise a polymer (e.g., as disclosed herein). The connecting material may comprise a sealing gasket. The connecting material may be curable (e.g., by heat, humidity and/or UV). The connecting material may have low resistance. The connecting material may comprise at least one polymer and/or at least one resin. The connecting material may have a low electrical resistance such that it is suitable for usage as a packing material in the electronic industry (e.g., for smartphones, packaging, liquid crystal displays, and personal computers. The connecting material may comprise polyethylene terephthalate (PET), very high bond (VHB) material (e.g., 3M VHB 4926), or SR, or SRS-40P. The connective material may comprise an acrylic material. The connecting material may retain its property and shape in ambient temperatures. The tensile strength of the connecting material may be at least about 0.60 MPa, 0.63 MPa, 0.66 MPa, 0.68 MPa, or 0.70 Mega Pascal (MPa). The shear strength of the connecting material may be at least about 0.54 MPa, 0.60 MPa, 0.620 MPa, 0.64 MPa, or 0.68 MPa. The shear strength may be smaller than the tensile strength. The shear strength and/or tensile strength may be such that they will be able to facilitate holding the display construct by the fastener (or any portion of the fattener to which the display construct is connected by the connecting material (e.g., adhesive)), e.g., for the projected life time and/or use time of the display construct. The connecting material may be hard and/or flexible. The connecting material may be an adhesive. The connecting material may be softer before its curing, and harder after its curing. The connecting material may be chosen to carry at least the load (e.g., weight) of the display construct, e.g., during constant and/or varying conditions (e.g., per its intended purpose). The bracket may include a straight portion, a curved portion, and/or a corner. The bracket may be devoid of a corner. The bracket may be straight or bent. The bracket may comprise two straight portions (e.g., two arms) that form (e.g., about) an angle. The angle may be a right angle or an obtuse angle. The bracket can be “L” shaped. An arm of the bracket and/or cover may be disposed between two panes, contact the display matrix, and/or contact the binder.

In some embodiments, wires are hidden from view of a user by the fastener (e.g., or any component thereof). For example, the bracket and/or cover may hide one or more (e.g., electrical) wires connected to the display matrix, e.g., from a user. The wires may be connected to the bracket and/or cover. The bracket and/or cover may comprise a recessed portion that is configured to accommodate the wire(s). In some embodiments, the cover and the bracket are the same component (e.g., 531). The recessed portion may be hidden from view of a user (e.g., may be disposed in the back portion of the bracket and/or cover). The wire(s) may connect to the display matrix (e.g., light array or LCD). The wire(s) may connect to a controller. The controller may comprise a timing controller and/or a microcontroller. The connecting material (e.g., connectors) may be disposed along the width (e.g., along fastener structure 104) of display construct. The connecting material may be disposed along at least about 50%, 80%, or 90% of the display construct width. The fastener may comprise a curved portion. The fastener may comprise a non-curved portion.

In some embodiments, the fastener comprises a hinge. In some embodiments, the hinge includes two leaves connected by a joint that forms an axis about which the leaves are configured to move about. A first leaf of the hinge may be operatively coupled (e.g., connected) to the bracket and/or cover. A second leaf of the hinge may be operatively coupled (e.g., connected) to a fixture. The fixture may be a wall or a window frame. The hinge may facilitate movement of the display construct around the hinge axis. The joint may facilitate opening of the hinge to an acute angle, a right angle, an obtuse angle, a flat angle (e.g., e.g., 180°), or complete rotation (e.g., ˜360°). Fastening the hinge to a fixture and to the display construct (e.g., via the bracket and/or cover) facilitates movement of the display construct about the axis of the hinge joint. Such movement may facilitate servicing the display construct without disturbance to the window (e.g., IGU) and/or to the fixture. Servicing may include cleaning, repairing, and/or replacing e.g., the display construct and any portion or component thereof.

In some embodiments, the fastener may comprise a plurality of components. The plurality of components may comprise a bracket, a cover, a hinge, and/or a board. The display construct may be coupled (e.g., connected) to a bracket and/or cover. The bracket and/or cover may be coupled to one leaf of the hinge. Another leaf of the hinge may be coupled to a fixture indirectly by coupling the other hinge leaf directly to a board that is directly connected to a fixture. The board may include any of the fastener material disclosed herein (e.g., elemental metal and/or metal alloy). The fastener can include a plurality of components of the same type. For example, the fastener can include a plurality of hinges, a plurality of brackets, a plurality of covers, and/or a plurality of boards. The plurality of fastener components can be at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, or 10 components (e.g., of the same type or of different types). The hinge may comprise hinge component set (e.g., knuckles and pintle). The fastener may comprise a plurality of hinge component sets. The hinge component sets may be aligned to have a single hinge axis. The fastener may be formed of two swiveling leaves about an axis of the hinge complement sets. AT least one (e.g., each) of the leaves may comprise a single slab incorporating half of the plurality of hinge components (e.g., knuckles)), such that when the two leaves are integrated, a plurality of functional hinge components sets are created (e.g., as shown in the example of FIG. 37 ). In some embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to form a plurality of operational hinge components, wherein each of the two leaves is formed of a single slap of material, form a fastener that is stronger and/or more durable as compared to coupling the display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each having a single hinge set. In some embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to form a plurality of operational hinge component, wherein each of the two leaves is formed of a single slab of material, form a fastener that is easier to install, maintain, and/or replace as compared to coupling the display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each having a single hinge set. In some embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to form a plurality of operational hinge component, wherein each of the two leaves is formed of a single slab, facilitate more accurate alignment of the display construct as compared to coupling the display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each having a single hinge set. Such a single fastener offers additional advantages such as incorporating heat exchangers (e.g., fan), directing the heat exchange (e.g., within the fastener and/or along the display construct), and/or coupling one or more circuit boards to the fastener.

In some embodiments, at least one leaf of the hinge comprises one or more holes. At least one hole of the one or more holes is configured to allow a screw to pass through and connect (e.g., reversibly) the hinge to the fixture (e.g., window frame) and/or bracket. The connection of the fastener (or any component thereof) to the display construct and/or fixture (e.g., window frame) may be (I) irreversible (e.g., using the connecting material) or (II) reversible (e.g., using one or more screws). The fixture and/or board may use both irreversible and reversible connection between itself and the display construct. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the window frame and irreversibly to the bracket. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the bracket and irreversibly to the window frame. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the window frame and reversibly to the bracket, which will be connected irreversibly (e.g., glued) to the display construct. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the wall and reversibly to the cover, which will be connected irreversibly (e.g., glued) to the display construct. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the board and reversibly to the cover, which will be connected irreversibly (e.g., glued) to the display construct. The board may be coupled reversibly (e.g., via screw(s)) or irreversibly (e.g., via binder (e.g., glue)) to the fixture. FIG. 4 shows a schematic example of a hinge 400 having a first leaf 401 having a plurality of holes (e.g., 411) that allow movement of a screw in one direction; and a second leaf 402 having a plurality of holes that allow movement of a screw in a second direction, which first direction may be perpendicular to the second direction. The hinge shown in FIG. 4 has a joint 420 that facilitates rotation of the first leaf with respect to the second leaf. In some embodiments, the first leaf has hole(s) having a long axis in a first direction, and the second leaf has hole(s) having a long axis in a second direction, which first direction forms an angle with the second direction that is non-zero (e.g., the first direction can be perpendicular to the second direction). Which relative direction of the long axis can be measured when the hinge is closed, and the two leaves lie one on top of the other. In some embodiments, the bracket may be an extension of a leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the bracket may be coupled (e.g., fastened) to the leaf of the hinge, e.g., reversibly (e.g., via crew(s)) or irreversibly (e.g., via adhesive). In some embodiments, the cover may be an extension of a leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the cover may be coupled (e.g., fastened) to the leaf of the hinge, e.g., reversibly (e.g., via crew(s)) or irreversibly (e.g., via adhesive).

In some embodiments, electrical circuitry is communicatively coupled to the display construct. The electrical circuitry may (i) boost the signal transmitted to the display matrix, and/or (ii) transmit power arriving from a power supply to the display matrix. In some embodiments, the circuitry may comprise touch screen circuitry. In some embodiments, the touch screen circuitry may be separate (e.g., and be disposed in a touch screen sensor cover). In some embodiments, the circuitry may connect touch screen sensor(s) to the power supply. In some embodiments, the touch screen circuitry may have a separate connector to the power supply.

FIG. 5 shows an example of an assembly 520 in which a display construct 500 (partial view shown) connected to a fastener that includes an L bracket that is the first cover portion 501, a thermal pad 505, flexible electrical connectors such as 506 (MXC) connector, a circuitry 502 (e.g., a booster board), a flexible insulator 503 and a second cover portion 504; and 510 shows a schematic bottom view of the circuitry board with screws and connectivity, which circuitry board is attached to a cover. The assembly 520 is shown from a different perspective in 530, indicating the display construct 536, flexible wiring (e.g., MXC) 535, a first portion of the cover 531 (partial view shown) that is a bracket, gasket (e.g., flexible insulator) 533 (partial view shown), circuitry 532 (partial view shown), and a second portion of the cover 534 (partial view shown). The flexible insulator can be a foam gasket (e.g., poron). The flexible insulator can have a least 25% compression. The bracket can have one or more thermal pads disposed on it. Referring to FIG. 5 , in one embodiment, L-bracket 501 is seen to extend across a linear dimension of a transparent display (and affixed to cover glass 500), which L bracket 501 is the first cover. In one embodiment, the length of bracket 501 may be up to about 10 feet. The circuitry (e.g., signal booster) may be connected to the display matrix by one or more flexible wiring (e.g., MXC). At times a plurality of circuitry boards (e.g., at least 2, 3, or 4 boards) may be disposed in the fastener (e.g., between the first and second cover). FIG. 5 shown an example of two circuit boards 502 and 507. One or more (e.g., flexible) connectors may connect the circuitry board to the flexible display matrix. The number of flexible connectors (e.g., MXCs) may be at least 2, 5, 6, 8, or 10. FIG. 5 shows examples of flexible connectors 516, 535, and 506. One or more (micro) cable bundles and/or (e.g., micro) coaxial cables may couple (i) the circuitry (e.g., booster) disposed in the fastener with (ii) the controller (e.g., timing controller). One or more (micro) cable bundles and/or (e.g., micro) coaxial cables may be connected by a connector to the circuit board (e.g., the booster board). The number of electrical connectors (e.g., connector 630 (partial view shown), e.g., IPLEX connectors) between the circuit board and the controller may be at least 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. FIG. 5 shows an example of the electrical cable 513 connecting the board (e.g., driver board) and the controller (e.g., timing controller). One or more fine wiring bundles may connect the controller (e.g., T-CON) to a booster board that is connected to flexible connectors (e.g., MXC cable) to the display matrix (e.g., TOLED). The fosterer may be configured to secure, house, and/or hide the cables and/or wiring from being viewed by a viewer of the display construct.

The electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables thereof) may be at least partially masked from view of a user by the fastener (or any component thereof, e.g., by the hinge and/or by the board). The electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables thereof) may be at least partially secured from contact by a user. The bracket, cover, board, and/or hinge may have an openable portion. The openable portion may swivel around an axis (e.g., the openable portion may swivel around a secondary hinge to facilitate it's swiveling). The Fastener may have one or more of its component types (e.g., one or more brackets, one or more covers, one or more boards, one or more primary hinges, and/or one or more secondary hinges). One or more components of the fastener can span a FLS of the display construct and/or viewing window, or a portion thereof. The openable and/or removable portion may facilitate servicing the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables thereof), e.g., without disassembling the fastener from the supporting structure to which it is coupled and/or from the display construct. Usage of the opening (coupled with the secondary hinge or without any secondary hinge) may facilitate (e.g., reversible) detachment of the connective cabling between (i) the E-box and/or power supply box and (ii) the circuitry attached to the display construct (e.g., display construct and/or touch screen related circuitry). Such (e.g., reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow replacement and/or servicing of the E-box and/or of the power supply, without disassembling the fastener from the supportive structure and/or from the display construct. Such (e.g., reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow replacement and/or servicing of the display construct and/or fastener, without disassembling the E-box and/or power supply unit. Such (e.g., reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow separation (e.g., disconnection) between (I) the display construct—fastener assembly, and (II) the E-box and/or power supply unit. The display construct—fastener assembly may optionally comprise touch screen facilitator (e.g., sensor and emitter panels). For example, the openable and/or removable portion (e.g., a secondary hinge) may facilitate servicing a booster board or any cables and/or connectors connected thereto. Servicing may include removing, repairing, replacing, and/or cleaning. For example, the board may have a secondary opening that facilitates exposing at least a portion of the controller and/or wiring. FIG. 10 shows an example of a secondary opening including portions 1017 and 1021 as part of the fastening system. A cushion may be disposed between the openable and/or removable portion and the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables thereof). The cushion can protect the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables thereof) and/or prevent its movement. Protection can be from light, temperature (e.g., heat or cold), contact, humidity, and/or oxygen. The cushion may comprise a polymeric foam (e.g., polyurethane). The cushion may comprise a foam gasket. This cushion may aid in maintaining a (e.g., reasonable) bending radius on the wire(s). The wiring may comprise microflex-complete (MXC) cable(s), e.g., to connect the circuitry to the controller (e.g., timing controller) and/or power source. The wiring may be coupled to the circuitry via one or more connectors (e.g., IPEX or micro connectors). The micro connectors may connect the circuitry (e.g., disposed in the fastener) to the display matrix. The circuitry may comprise a booster board. Micro connectors can have a plurality of wires, e.g., bonded in an envelope. The wiring may comprise coaxial cable(s).

In some embodiments, the fastener may comprise a regression forming an opening. The regression may be a secondary opening. The regression may be centered about the middle length of the fastener. The regression may or may not be covered. The covering of the regression may or may not be reversible. For example, the covering may be a secondary hinge leaf. The covering may be bolted to the fastener with screw(s) and/or clips. The fastener may comprise two hinge leaves that are coupled with knuckles and pintle mechanism to form a hinge. The regression may be covered when the fastener is in its closed hinge position. The regression may be (reversibly) covered when the (primary) fastener hinge(s) is in its closed position. The regression may be (reversibly) opened when the (primary) fastener hinge(s) is in its open position. FIG. 10 shows a cover 17017 that covers an opening in fastener 1021. The width of the regression (e.g., see FIG. 41 , broken arrow W_(opening)) may extend to at most about 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, or 30% of the hinge leaf width (e.g., see FIG. 41 , broken arrow W_(total)) The regression may be from an edge from the hinge leaf towards its internal portion. The regression may be an opening within the hinge leaf (e.g., a window within the hinge leaf), e.g., having the above references extension as its width. The length of the opening (e.g., regression. E.g., see FIG. 41 , broken arrow L_(opening)) may extend to at most about 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, or 10% of the total length of the hinge leaf (e.g., see FIG. 41 , broken arrow L_(total)). The regression may extend to a width and/or length that may facilitate connecting and/or disconnecting any connectors that couple a circuit board to the display construct and/or touch screen related apparatus (e.g., sensor and emitter panel). The opening (e.g., regression) may or may not be centered about a length and/or a width of the fastener (or any hinge leaf thereof).

In some embodiments, the controller may comprise a timing controller (abbreviated herein as “T-CON”). The timing controller may control operation timing of various components of the display matrix (e.g., when a LED is lit up in the display matrix). The timing controller can translate between a video signal and a row and a column driver signaling required by the display matrix. The media signal may be transmitted to the T-CON board over a communication interface such as Low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS), Embedded DisplayPort (eDP), Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI®), Display Serial Interface (DSI), or VX1. The circuitry (e.g., chip therein and/or controller) may comprise a 60 Hz to 120 Hz frame rate converters. The timing controller may refresh a charge to minimize optical response decay of the LCD chemical(s) responding to electrical charge, e.g., at a rate to keep the signal uniform, avoid decay, and/or adequate update. The controller (e.g., T-CON) may be disposed at a distance from the display construct assembly that includes the display construct and the fastening system (e.g., fastener).

In some embodiments, the display construct is operatively coupled (e.g., connected by wiring) to a power supply. The circuitry is operatively coupled (e.g., connected by wiring) to a power supply. The connection may be direct or indirect. The indirect connection may be through the circuitry (e.g., booster). The power supply may be a secondary power supply. The power supply may be coupled to the municipal power source (e.g., power plant), and/or building power source (e.g., generator, solar cell(s), and/or wind turbine). Power source may be renewable and/or non-renewable. The power source may be coupled to the BMS. The power source may be coupled to a network infrastructure (e.g., as disclosed herein). The power source may supply power at about 240V or 120V (e.g., house current) AC. The secondary power source may comprise a converter reducing the voltage (e.g., to at most about 24V, 48V, or 54 Volts (V)). FIG. 6 shows an example of a perspective view of an assembly 600 including a display construct coupled to a fastener and a circuitry in which a fastener 602 (partial view shown) is coupled to a display construct 601 (partial view shown) that is connected through wiring 603 (partial view shown) to a circuitry (not shown) disposed in the fastener, which wiring is secured by hooks such as hook 604. The hook can be a tie mount. FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of a hinge leaf 634 to onto which wiring 633 are connected to, which wiring are connected to a circuitry 632, which hinge leaf 634 is joined with hinge leaf portion 635 (partial view shown) and hinge leaf 636 portion that is connected by a screw 637 to a fixture (not shown). Hinge leaf portions 635 and 636 are part of the same hinge leaf. FIG. 6 shows a side view example of an assembly 620 including a fastener 662 coupled with screws, e.g., 661, to a fixture (not shown), which fixture has dangling wiring 667 emerging from its body and fastened to a hook 666. The wiring 667 is connected (i) to a circuitry (not shown) disposed in the fastener body 662 and to (ii) a display construct (partial view shown) that includes a display matrix 664 that is disposed between a thicker glass 665 and a thinner glass 663. FIG. 6 shows a side view example of an assembly 612 (similar to 620) disposed in a vertical cross section of a window frame 610. FIG. 6 shows an example of electrical wiring 630 that can be utilized in the display construct assembly. The fastener may comprise a driver and/or booster board. The circuitry may facilitate data (e.g., network communication) and/or power transmission.

The secondary power source may supply a direct current (DC) voltage. The secondary power source may be disposed adjacent to the display construct and/or IGU. The secondary power source can be disposed in the window frame, in a wall, in a floor, or in a ceiling. The controller of the display construct can be disposed separately from its power supply. The shortest distance from (i) the display construct, booster board, driver board, and/or timing controller (e.g., T-CON) to (ii) the power supply can be at least about 0.25 m, 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m, 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, 10 m, or 20 meters (m). The shortest distance from (i) the display construct, booster board, driver board, and/or timing controller to (ii) the power supply can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.25 to about 20 m, from about 0.25 m to about 5 m, from about 5 m to about 7 m, or from about 7 m to about 20 m). For example, the shortest distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON can be at least about 1.5 m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m, 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, or 10 m. The shortest distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 1.5 to about 10 m, from about 1.5 m to about 5 m, or from about 5 m to about 10 m). The shortest distance from (i) the display construct and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5′ to about 30′, from about 10′ to about 25′, or from about 15′ to about 20′). For example, the shortest distance from (i) the driver board and/or display construct to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON can be at least about 5′, 10′, 15′, 20′, 25′, 25′, 30′, 50′, 100′, 200′, or 300′ (feet). The shortest distance from (i) the display construct, and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or timing controller can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5′ to about 300′, from about 10′ to about 25′, from about 15′ to about 20′, from about 20′ to about 50′, from about 50′ to about 200′, or from about 100′ to about 300′).

In some embodiments, a local controller may control the viewing (e.g., tintable) window (e.g., as part of the IGU) and/or the display construct. The local controller may be part of a control network. The control network may be a hierarchal control network (e.g., as disclosed herein). The hierarchy of the controllers in the control network may be static or dynamic. The local controller may be disposed adjacent to the display construct and/or IGU. The local controller can be disposed in the window frame, in a wall, in a floor, or in a ceiling. In some embodiments, one local controller controls the viewing (e.g., tintable) window and the display construct (e.g., the media displayed by the display construct). In some embodiments, separate controllers control the viewing (e.g., tintable) window and the display construct (e.g., the media displayed by the display construct). Communication between the local controller and other components of the network interface may be wired and/or wireless. The wired communication may include coaxial cable, twisted pair, NM cable, Underground Feeder (UF) cable, Thermoplastic High Heat-resistant Nylon-coated (THHN) wire, Thermoplastic Heat and Water-resistant Nylon-coated (THWN) wire, standard phone wire, or category 3 (Cat 3) cable, and/or category 5 (Cat 5) cable. The control system (e.g., the local controller) may be communicatively coupled to the display construct (e.g., via the timing controller (T-CON)) by wired and/or wireless communication. For example, the display construct may be connected to the local controller via one or more wires and/or wirelessly. For example, the T-CON may be connected to the local controller via one or more wires. The shortest distance from (i) the display construct and/or T-CON to (ii) the local controller can be at least about 0.25 m, 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m, 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, 10 meters (m). The shortest distance from (i) the display construct and/or T-CON to (ii) the local controller can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.25 to about 10 m, from about 0.25 m to about 5 m, from about 5 m to about 7 m, or from about 7 m to about 10 m). The distance may correspond to a minimal measure of the wire length (e.g., when the display construct is communicatively coupled to the local controller at least in part via wiring). The shortest distance (I) between the display construct and the local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply, may be (e.g., substantially) equal. The shortest distance (I) between the display construct and the local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply, may be (e.g., substantially) unequal. The shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply, may be (e.g., substantially) equal. For example, the shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, may be smaller than (II) between the local controller to the power supply. For example, the shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, may be longer than (II) between the local controller to the power supply. The shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply, may be (e.g., substantially) unequal. For example, the shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, may be smaller than (II) between the local controller to the power supply. For example, the shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, may be larger than (II) between the local controller to the power supply.

FIG. 7 shows an example of a vertical cross section of a display construct portions coupled to a circuitry and to a fastener, that includes: an L-bracket 701 is depicted in cross section, a circuitry 702 (e.g., a booster board), cable(s) 703, foam gasket 704, screw 705, tape 706, first glass pane 707, adhesive (e.g., OCA) 708, display matrix 709, second glass pane 710, cover 714, bumper 712, an adhesive 713, and 711 the viewing window (partial view shown). The display construct may comprise a flexible bumper (e.g., polymer or resin) that separates it from the window (e.g., 711). The bumper may prevent glass to glass contact between the display construct and the window (e.g., tintable window), which may lead to damage of the display construct and/or window (e.g., prevent cracks and/or breakage). The bumper may increase the safe operation of swiveling the display construct, e.g., about the hinge axis. In one embodiment in a cross-section, the L bracket is defined by one or more right angle, though the angle could be other than 90 degrees. In the embodiment depicted, L-bracket is affixed to a cover glass (e.g., 707) via an adhesive element. In embodiments, the adhesive element is an adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive tape comprises a VHB type tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive element is a liquid or gel adhesive that bonds the L-bracket to the cover glass. Cover glass (e.g., 707) may be plastic, glass or other transparent material. The thickness of the cover glass in one example can be about 4 mm, but it could be thicker or thinner than 4 mm. The cover glass may be part of the display construct (e.g., transparent display) and/or the display construct (e.g., transparent display) element may be laminated to the cover glass. In the example shown in FIG. 7 , a second cover glass 710 is laminated to a transparent display element 709, that is, transparent display element 709 (e.g., a T OLED) is sandwiched between cover glass 707 and second cover glass 710. The laminate structure formed may rest against the viewing window (e.g., 711) or be parallel to but spaced apart from the viewing window. The laminate structure comprising the first glass pane 707, the display matrix 709 and the second glass pane 710 (e.g., second glass cover) may be considered a transparent display assembly (also termed herein “display construct”).

In one embodiment, the adhesive element is of sufficient strength to support a weight of a transparent display assembly. As depicted, one face of L-bracket (e.g., 701) is used as a surface for the adhesive element and at least this much surface area is attached to the transparent display assembly, via the cover glass (e.g., 707).

As depicted in the example shown in FIG. 7 , a cover 714 is attached to L-bracket 701. In this example, L-bracket 701 includes an overhang portion on the vertical leg. Together with cover 714, a chamber is formed, within which a circuitry 702 for the display matrix is housed. Circuitry 702 may be in the form of a circuit board (e.g., a driver and/or booster board). In one embodiment the cover seals the electronics from the environment via one or more gaskets. In one embodiment, the L-bracket 701 is configured to provide movement and/or physical connectivity between a frame of a window and the display construct (e.g., see FIG. 1A). In one embodiment, circuitry 702 is coupled to a display matrix via one or more conductors, e.g., ribbon cable, flex circuit and/or other wired connections 175. In certain embodiments, wired connections 175 (refer to FIG. 2 b ) may be micro-coaxial cable (e.g., see 802, FIG. 8 ). In embodiments, wired connections 802 may terminate at the L-bracket with multipin connectors (see FIG. 8, 803 ).

In some embodiments, the display construct comprises a touch screen. The display construct may comprise at its edges one or more optical sensors to facilitate functionality of the touch screen by user(s). The touch screen can receive contact (e.g., touch) input from user(s) and deliver an output response. The response can be functional the response can include a change in visual, data, or sound. The touch screen can utilize the display matrix. The display construct can be operatively coupled to an information processing system (e.g., comprising one or more processors, and/or network interface). User(s) can the information processing system through simple (e.g., single) or multi-touch gestures by touching the display construct pane facing the user(s). Touch can be using a specialized device (e.g., stylus or electronic pen) or one or any portion of their body (e.g., more fingers). The specialized device may be adapted to the display construct. The touchscreen can be a resistive touchscreen, surface acoustic wave touchscreen (e.g., using ultrasonic waves), capacitive touchscreen, infrared grid touchscreen (e.g., using photodetectors), optical imaging (e.g., using CMOS sensors), infrared acrylic projection (e.g., comprising infrared LEDs), dispersive signal touchscreen, or acoustic pulse recognition touchscreen. The display construct is enhanced per requirements of the touch screen technology. For example, when sensors (e.g., COMS) and/or projectors (e.g., LEDs) are required for the touch screen, those are added to the display construct, e.g., by placing them inside a frame surrounding at least a portion of the display construct.

In some embodiments, the display construct can act as a touch screen. A frame may comprise one or more sensors disposed on or in the frame. The frame may include a circuitry, one or more connectors (e.g., to power supply and/or network system), and any optical component (e.g., reflector, mirror, prism, beam splitter, and/or lens). The sensors may be configured to detect a presence and position of a user's finger, stylus, marker, smart pen, and/or other marking and/or indicating device within an area bounded by the frame shape (e.g., an area spanned by a surface of a transparent display assembly). Sensors may be disposed along and/or within lengths of one or more frame portions (e.g., within a channel defined by one or more frame portion). One or more frame portions may comprise sensors, circuits, and/or connections. The one or more frame portions may include at least 1, 2, 3, or 4 frame portions (e.g., 1012, 1019, and 1020). The frame portion may be a bezel. The frame portion may comprise a groove. The frame portion may be configured to hold the display construct. The width of the frame portion groove may be configured to accommodate the width of the display construct. In some embodiments, all edges (e.g., sides) of the display construct may comprise touch screen frames. Circuits may process signals from sensors and output signals representative of a location of a marking or indicating device within an area bounded by a frame. A frame may comprise connections to other circuits, including circuits disposed on, or coupled to, the transparent display assembly (e.g., circuits on L-bracket). Circuits may comprise but are not limited to, one or more of: processor, memory, display, analog and/or digital circuits.

A frame may provide a transparent display assembly with interactive display functionality (e.g., white board functionality). A fixed or moving location of a user's finger or indicating device against a transparent display may be sensed by sensors of a frame within an area bounded by the frame, and signals representative of the location may be generated by circuits of the frame. Signals representative of a location within an area bounded by a frame may comprise signals compatible with display technology of a display. In some embodiments, signals representative of a location within an area bounded by a frame comprise, but are not limited to, universal serial bus (USB) and/or high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) signals. Signals representative of a fixed or moving location of a user's finger or indicating device within an area of a frame may be processed by software and/or circuits associated with the frame and/or transparent frame assembly. The processed signals may be displayed on a transparent display assembly, e.g., in the form of a representation of the fixed or moving location (e.g., as writing, printing, a shape). Software associated with the frame and/or transparent display may be configured to provide other functionality, including, but not limited to, (i) display of a sensed location of a user's finger, or other indicating device, on another display or device, (ii) interaction with the transparent display and frame by more than one user, (iii) export of displayed content, (iv) import of display content, (v) erase of displayed content, and/or (vi) selection of display colors. In one embodiment, a frame may comprise one or more commercially available touch screens (e.g., from FlatFrog USA Inc. 333 West San Carlos Street, San Jose CA 95110).

FIG. 10 shows an example of a display construct 1010, components of a fastener that includes leaf 1021, primary hinges 1018 and 1015 that allow swiveling of the display construct about their axis, secondary hinge (including portion 1017) that facilitates exposure of a portion of circuitry 1016 (e.g., of a booster board and/or driver board). Leaf 1021 has an opening that facilitates accessing the circuitry 1016 through the opening covered by hinge leaf 1017. Display construct 1010 is framed by touch screen sensor array 1013 and protective covers 1012 and 1019 that cover the sensor array in a protective framing. Display construct 1050 shows a touch screen sensor array covered and assembled 1052 with the display construct 1050, and well as an assembled fastener 1056. In some examples, the secondary hinge (e.g., 1017) is absent (e.g., as in example 3504). In some embodiments, the fastener (including the primary hinge) has an opening through which at least a portion of the circuitry (e.g., PCB) is viewable and/or accessible. For example, at least some of the connectors in the circuitry can be viewable and/or accessible through the opening. For example, at least some of the connectors between the circuitry and the display construct can be viewable and/or accessible through the opening (e.g., see FIG. 35 opening 3504 allowing viewing of connectors 3509 attached to circuitry 3530 (e.g., comprising the booster and/or driver board)).

In one embodiment, a fastener comprises one or more portion that is configured to provide physical connectivity of the transparent display to a window (e.g., a hinge). In one embodiment, one or more portion of a fastener is configured to provide movement between the transparent display and a lite of a window (e.g., using a hinge of the fastener).

With reference to FIG. 4 , in one embodiment, L-bracket comprises one or hinges, e.g., hinge 400. In one embodiment, the hinge comprises a plurality of elongated holes or slots. In one embodiment, an axis of elongation of at least one of the plurality of holes is orthogonal to an axis of elongation of at least one other of the plurality of holes. This allows for a method of installation of the transparent display assembly to the window frame. For example, one or more hinges (e.g., 400) are mounted to the window frame via holes that provide a distance at which the transparent display assembly will be from the window (e.g., 711). Prior to its mounting, L-bracket (e.g., 701), pre-mounted to the transparent display assembly, can be affixed to the other leg of the one or more hinges (e.g., 400), which provides, via the other plurality of holes, orthogonal to those on the other leg of the hinge, centering the L-bracket/transparent display element within the viewable area of the window, between the framing elements.

With reference to FIG. 7 , in one embodiment, one or more hinges having a joint 750 that connects a first hinge leaf 752 and a second hinge leaf 753 shown in a closed position 791. The open position is shown in 720, in which the dotted arrow 790 indicated the relative movement of the first hinge leaf can be termed herein as “first leg,” and the second hinge leaf may be termed herein as a “second leg.” The first leg can be coupled to or comprises the bracket. The fastener comprising the hinge leaves 752 and 753 is coupled to a display construct 754 (partial view shown), and to a window 751(partial view shown). The second leg can be coupled to a window frame 755. In one embodiment, one or hinges are configured to enable movement of a transparent display assembly away or toward the viewing window. In one embodiment the movement is rotational about a longitudinal axis, i.e. a pivot. In one embodiment, during a movement of a transparent display relative to a viewing window, no movement of the transparent display assembly occurs relative to circuitry 757 (e.g., booster and/or driver board), conductors 758 such as a ribbon cable and/or other wiring elements used to couple the transparent display to the circuitry. FIG. 7 shows an example of a display construct 784 (partial view shown) coupled to a first hinge leaf 782. The hinge leaf 782 is joined by joint 780 to the second hinge leaf 783 that is coupled to cover 785 that is coupled to a window frame for window 781 (partial view shown).

This configuration provides for longer life to the electrical connections between the display and the controller (e.g., T-CON), because the connections are not subject to the movement and friction associated with movement of the transparent display and fastener (e.g., bracket) assembly.

Referring to FIG. 8 , in one embodiment, a seal is provided along at least 3 edges of a transparent display assembly, e.g., along the edge of a laminate assembly as described herein. In embodiments, the seal is in the form of a silicone or other transparent plastic, resin, or other polymer cap (or bumper) that fits over the laminate transparent assembly edges, sealing the unit. The seal may provide a bumper function between the second cover glass (e.g., FIG. 7, 710 ) and the window (e.g., FIG. 7, 711 ). FIG. 8 shows an example of a perspective view of display construct 850 and a seal that is applied according to arrows 811, 812, and 813 along three sides of display construct 850, e.g., by use of an applicator (e.g., syringe gun) 810. Display construct 850 is coupled to fastener 530 onto which wires 802 connect a display matrix in the display construct, with a circuitry disposed in the fastener (now shown). The display construct 850 is shown in the example of FIG. 8 also as a vertical cross section 830 of a portion of a display construct that includes a thicker supportive structure (e.g., glass pane) 804, a thinner supportive structure (e.g., glass pane) 805, adhesive layers 806 and 808, a display matrix 807, and a seal 809. The seal may protrude from the supportive structures (e.g., glass panes) and/or serve as a bumper. The protrusion of the seal may be random, or directional. For example, the protrusion may be directed towards one side of the display construct (e.g., that is destined to touch the window). The protrusion of the seal may be (e.g., substantially) uniform or non-uniform (e.g., towards one side of the display construct).

FIG. 9 shows an example of a cover 903 (shown in cross section) that may be used to conceal L-bracket 904 from view. Cover 903 may be removably attached to window frame 905. Power and communications may be delivered to the transparent display assembly via wires 906, in this example housed within window frame 905. L-bracket may allow servicing of the transparent display or replacement, and/or servicing or replacement of any circuitry (e.g., disposed in a fastener of which the bracket is a part of). FIG. 9 shows an example of a transparent display assembly having a display construct including (e.g., glass) pane 907, display matrix 908, and (e.g., glass) pane 902, which display construct is coupled to, or be comprised of, a frame 905. A frame may comprise portions coupled, or configured to be coupled, to each other. A frame may comprise at least three (3) portions. A frame may comprise a shape that (e.g., approximates) matches a shape of at least a portion of a periphery of a display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). A frame may be coupled or attached to sides (or to edges) of a display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). In one embodiment, frame portions are coupled to each other to form a frame shape, e.g., after the frame portions have been coupled to a display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). In one embodiment, frame portions may be coupled to each other to form a frame shape, e.g., before the frame portions are coupled to a display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). A display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly) may be positioned within an area bounded by the frame shape. Frame portions may comprise channels (e.g., U-shaped channels) configured to receive and/or retain sides of a transparent display assembly therein.

FIG. 9 shows an example of a window frame (e.g., a mullion) portion 951 to which a fastener is attached 953 (which fastener includes a hinge/lock 952). Fastener 953 is coupled to a display construct 954 (partial view shown) and to an integrated glass unit 961 (IGU) (partial view shown) that includes: a first pane 955, an enclosed environment 957, a second pane 956, and an electrochromic construct 958 disposed on pane 956. The enclosed environment in the IGU can be an insulated, (e.g., hermitically) sealed, and/or inert environment. FIG. 9 shows an example of a power source unit and/or controller (e.g., timing controller) that are collectively designated as numeral 959, disposed in the frame portion 951, and electrical wiring and/or communication pathways 960 that travel from an environment external to the window frame 951 to the display construct 954. The electrical wiring and/or communication pathways can travel through the window frame to the IGU. The electrical wiring and/or communication pathways can travel to the IGU through the controller and/or power source assembly. The pane can be of a transparent hard material (e.g., glass or polymeric such as plastic). Transparent can be at least in the wavelengths sensitive to an average human viewer.

The present invention should not be limited by the embodiments, aspects and advantages disclosed above as other embodiments, aspects and advantages are within its scope, including one or more of those that follow. In one embodiment, the present invention comprises a structure (e.g., a fastener), wherein the structure (e.g., fastener) is comprised of a first portion and a second portion, the first and second portion configured to move relative to each other. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more bracket. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more hinge. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more electrical connector. In one embodiment, the electrical connector comprises a micro-coax cable. In one embodiment, the electrical connector comprises one or more ribbon cable. In one embodiment the structure is configured to be mounted to a display construct (e.g., comprising transparent display). In one embodiment, the transparent display is a T. OLED display. In one embodiment, the display construct (e.g., including the transparent display) comprises one or more optically clear glass, hardened polymer (e.g., plastic), or a hardened resin. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more electronic circuit configured to communicate with the display matrix (e.g., transparent display matrix). In one embodiment, the structure is configured to mount to a frame. In one embodiment, the frame comprises a window frame. In one embodiment, the structure is configured to be mounted to a FLS (e.g., a length) of the transparent display. In one embodiment, the structure comprises a length, wherein the length is from about 0.1 feet to about 10 feet. In one embodiment, a first portion of the fastener comprises at least one bracket and the second portion of the fastener comprises one or more hinges. In one embodiment, the structure comprises a display matrix, and an adhesive element, wherein the display matrix is mounted to the first portion and/or to second portion, e.g., via the adhesive element. In one embodiment, the adhesive elements comprise an adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive tape comprises VHB tape. In one embodiment, the first portion of the fastener and/or second portion of the fastener is configured to be mounted to a viewing window (e.g., tintable window). In one embodiment, the first portion of the fastener is configured to be mounted to a display construct and the second portion is configured to be mounted to a window (wherein the second portion comprise a hinge). In one embodiment, the hinge comprises a plurality of elongated holes, wherein an axis of elongation of at least one of the plurality of holes is orthogonal to an axis of elongation of at least one other of the plurality of holes.

In one embodiment, the present invention comprises a frame. The frame can be comprised of a transparent display and a fastener (comprising a bracket) configured to provide movement and physical connectivity between the frame and the display construct (e.g., comprising the transparent display). In one embodiment, the frame comprises a window frame. In one embodiment the bracket comprises an L-bracket, wherein the L-bracket is coupled to the frame and to the display construct (e.g., comprising the transparent display). In one embodiment, the bracket is coupled to the transparent display via an adhesive structure. In one embodiment, the adhesive structure comprises adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the bracket comprises one or more hinge. In one embodiment, the hinge is configured to provide the movement of the display construct (e.g., comprising the transparent display) relative to a fixture (e.g., window frame). In one embodiment, the movement comprises rotational movement. In one embodiment, the movement is about a horizontal axis. In one embodiment, the movement is about a vertical axis. In one embodiment, the frame comprises a lite (e.g., a windowpane). In one embodiment, the bracket is configured to move a face of the transparent display close to or against a face of the lite. In one embodiment, the frame defines an interior area (e.g., that is a surface of the window in the frame), wherein the transparent display comprises a height and a width that defines an area that fits within the interior area. In one embodiment, the area of the display construct (e.g., comprising the transparent display) fits (e.g., substantially) within all the interior area. In one embodiment, the area of the transparent display fits within one half or less than one half of the interior area. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more conductor, ribbon cable and/or connector, and the one or more conductor, ribbon cable and/or connector provides electrical connectivity between a control and the transparent display.

In some embodiments, an assembly having a display construct and a fastener is formed. The display construct can be adhered to at least a component of the fastener, e.g., a bracket. FIG. 11 shows an example of stage in construction an assembly of a display construct and a fastener. In 1110, a display construct 1112 has an area 1112 designated for adhesive application. In 1120, an adhesive is applied on the adhesive designated area according to arrows the arrows, e.g., 1121. In 1130, a fastener 1131 (e.g., L bracket) is placed on the adhesive designated area having an applied adhesive placed thereon. Items 1121, 1131, and 1112 show portions of display constructs. The fastener and the display construct can be disposed in the same plane or in different planes. At least a portion of the fastener can be disposed in the same plane or in different planes relative to the display construct. The display construct can be coupled at an angle to the fastener (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12, 1210 ). The display construct and the fastener can form one plane (e.g., as shown in 1220). FIG. 12 shows an example of display construct 1211 forming an angle with fastener 1218, and display construct 1221 forming a planar plane with fastener 1228. The display construct may comprise irradiating entities (e.g., LEDs) that irradiate more in one direction than in another (e.g., more in a forward direction than in a back direction). An image displayed by a display matrix may be visible clearly from one side of the display matrix than from its opposing side. The display construct may comprise two display matrices of irradiating entities (e.g., LED matrices) disposed back to back. The at least one (e.g., each) of the two display matrices may be disposed with its more irradiating side facing away from the back (and towards a viewer), and its less irradiating side facing the back (and away from the viewer). The back to back arrangement of the display matrices in the display construct may facilitate clear image viewing from both sides of the display construct. A display construct having back to back display matrices may utilize a flat fasteners (e.g., 1228). In some embodiments, two display constructs may be disposed adjacent to each other in a back to back configuration, e.g., such that at least one (e.g., each) of the display constructs may have its more illuminating side facing away from the back (and towards a viewer), and its less irradiating side facing the back (and away from the viewer). The two back to back display constructs may utilize a flat fastener (e.g., 1228) to fasten both display constructs to a structure (e.g., fixture).

In some embodiments, the window is disposed in an enclosure. In some embodiments, an enclosure comprises an area defined by at least one structure. The at least one structure may comprise at least one wall. An enclosure may comprise and/or enclose one or more sub-enclosure. The at least one wall may comprise metal (e.g., steel), clay, stone, plastic, glass, plaster (e.g., gypsum), polymer (e.g., polyurethane, styrene, or vinyl), asbestos, fiber-glass, concrete (e.g., reinforced concrete), wood, paper, or a ceramic. The at least one wall may comprise wire, bricks, blocks (e.g., cinder blocks), tile, drywall, or frame (e.g., steel frame).

In some embodiments, the enclosure comprises one or more openings. The one or more openings may be reversibly closable. The one or more openings may be permanently open. A fundamental length scale of the one or more openings may be smaller relative to the fundamental length scale of the wall(s) that define the enclosure. A fundamental length scale may comprise a diameter of a bounding circle, a length, a width, or a height. A surface of the one or more openings may be smaller relative to the surface the wall(s) that define the enclosure. The opening surface may be a percentage of the total surface of the wall(s). For example, the opening surface can measure at most about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1% of the walls(s). The wall(s) may comprise a floor, a ceiling, or a side wall. The closable opening may be closed by at least one window or door. The enclosure may be at least a portion of a facility. The facility may comprise a building. The enclosure may comprise at least a portion of a building. The building may be a private building and/or a commercial building. The building may comprise one or more floors. The building (e.g., floor thereof) may include at least one of: a room, hall, foyer, attic, basement, balcony (e.g., inner or outer balcony), stairwell, corridor, elevator shaft, façade, mezzanine, penthouse, garage, porch (e.g., enclosed porch), terrace (e.g., enclosed terrace), cafeteria, and/or Duct. In some embodiments, an enclosure may be stationary and/or movable (e.g., a train, an airplane, a ship, a vehicle, or a rocket).

In some embodiments, the enclosure encloses an atmosphere. The atmosphere may comprise one or more gases. The gases may include inert gases (e.g., comprising argon or nitrogen) and/or non-inert gases (e.g., comprising oxygen or carbon dioxide). The enclosure atmosphere may resemble an atmosphere external to the enclosure (e.g., ambient atmosphere) in at least one external atmosphere characteristic that includes: temperature, relative gas content, gas type (e.g., humidity, and/or oxygen level), debris (e.g., dust and/or pollen), and/or gas velocity. The enclosure atmosphere may be different from the atmosphere external to the enclosure in at least one external atmosphere characteristic that includes: temperature, relative gas content, gas type (e.g., humidity, and/or oxygen level), debris (e.g., dust and/or pollen), and/or gas velocity. For example, the enclosure atmosphere may be less humid (e.g., drier) than the external (e.g., ambient) atmosphere. For example, the enclosure atmosphere may contain the same (e.g., or a substantially similar) oxygen-to-nitrogen ratio as the atmosphere external to the enclosure. The velocity of the gas in the enclosure may be (e.g., substantially) similar throughout the enclosure. The velocity of the gas in the enclosure may be different in different portions of the enclosure (e.g., by flowing gas through to a vent that is coupled with the enclosure).

Certain disclosed embodiments provide a network infrastructure in the enclosure (e.g., a facility such as a building). The network infrastructure is available for various purposes such as for providing communication and/or power services. The communication services may comprise high bandwidth (e.g., wireless and/or wired) communications services. The communication services can be to occupants of a facility and/or users outside the facility (e.g., building). The network infrastructure may work in concert with, or as a partial replacement of, the infrastructure of one or more cellular carriers. The network infrastructure can be provided in a facility that includes electrically switchable windows. Examples of components of the network infrastructure include a high speed backhaul. The network infrastructure may include at least one cable, switch, physical antenna, transceivers, sensor, transmitter, receiver, radio, processor and/or controller (that may comprise a processor). The network infrastructure may be operatively coupled to, and/or include, a wireless network. The network infrastructure may comprise wiring. One or more sensors can be deployed (e.g., installed) in an environment as part of installing the network and/or after installing the network. The network infrastructure may be configured to facilitate at least third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G), or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication. The network may be configured to facilitate media transmission (e.g., presentation, still, or video (e.g., movie, and/or advertisement) transmission). The network may be configured for simultaneous data and power communication (e.g., on the same cable such as a coaxial cable). The network may be a local network. The network may comprise a cable configured to transmit power and communication in a single cable. The communication can be one or more types of communication. The communication can comprise cellular communication abiding by at least a second generation (2G), third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. The communication may comprise media communication facilitating stills, music, or moving picture streams (e.g., movies or videos). The communication may comprise data communication (e.g., sensor data). The communication may comprise control communication, e.g., to control the one or more nodes operatively coupled to the networks. The network may comprise a first (e.g., cabling) network installed in the facility. The network may comprise a (e.g., cabling) network installed in an envelope of the facility (e.g., such as in an envelope of an enclosure of the facility. For example, in an envelope of a building included in the facility).

In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a network that is configured for transmission of any communication (e.g., signal) and/or (e.g., electrical) power facilitating any of the operations disclosed herein. The communication may comprise control communication, cellular communication, media communication, and/or data communication. The data communication may comprise sensor data communication and/or processed data communication. The networks may be configured to abide by one or more protocols facilitating such communication. For example, a communications protocol used by the network (e.g., with a BMS) can comprise a building automation and control networks protocol (BACnet). The network may be configured for (e.g., include hardware facilitating) communication protocols comprising BACnet (e.g., BACnet/SC), LonWorks, Modbus, KNX, European Home Systems Protocol (EHS), BatiBUS, European Installation Bus (EIB or Instabus), zigbee, Z-wave, Insteon, X10, Bluetooth, or WiFi. The network may be configure to transmit the control related protocol. A communication protocol may facilitate cellular communication abiding by at least a 2^(nd), 3^(rd) 4^(th) or 5^(th) generation cellular communication protocol. The (e.g., cabling) network may comprise a tree, line, or star topologies. The network may comprise interworking and/or distributed application models for various tasks of the building automation. The control system may provide schemes for configuration and/or management of resources on the network. The network may permit binding of parts of a distributed application in different nodes operatively coupled to the network. The network may provide a communication system with a message protocol and models for the communication stack in each node (capable of hosting distributed applications (e.g., having a common Kernel). The control system may comprise programmable logic controller(s) (PLC(s)).

In some embodiments, an enclosure includes one or more sensors. The sensor may facilitate controlling the environment of the enclosure such that inhabitants of the enclosure may have an environment that is more comfortable, delightful, beautiful, healthy, productive (e.g., in terms of inhabitant performance), easer to live (e.g., work) in, or any combination thereof. The sensor(s) may be configured as low or high resolution sensors. Sensor may provide on/off indications of the occurrence and/or presence of a particular environmental event (e.g., one pixel sensors).

In various embodiments, a network infrastructure supports a control system for one or more viewing windows such as electrochromic (e.g., tintable) windows. The control system may comprise one or more controllers operatively coupled (e.g., directly or indirectly) to one or more windows. In some embodiments, electrochromic window is an example of optically switchable windows, tintable windows, and/or smart windows. The concepts disclosed herein may apply to other types of switchable optical devices including, for example, a liquid crystal device, or a suspended particle device. For example, a liquid crystal device and/or a suspended particle device may be implemented instead of, or in addition to, an electrochromic device.

In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (e.g., controllable and/or reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, e.g., when a stimulus is applied. The stimulus can include an optical, electrical and/or magnetic stimulus. For example, the stimulus can include an applied voltage. One or more tintable windows can be used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through them. One or more tintable windows can be used to control a temperature within a building, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through them. Control of the solar energy may control heat load imposed on the interior of the facility (e.g., building). The control may be manual and/or automatic. The control may be used for maintaining one or more requested (e.g., environmental) conditions, e.g., occupant comfort. The control may include reducing energy consumption of a heating, ventilation, air conditioning and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by one system. The heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as “HVAC). In some cases, tintable windows may be responsive to (e.g., and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental sensors and/or user control. Tintable windows may comprise (e.g., may be) electrochromic windows. The windows may be located in the range from the interior to the exterior of a structure (e.g., facility, e.g., building). However, this need not be the case. Tintable windows may operate using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices, microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices (such as micro shutters), or any technology configured to control light transmission through a window. Windows (e.g., with MEMS devices for tinting) are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/443,353, filed May 15, 2015, titled “MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES,” that is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more viewing (e.g., tintable) windows can be located within the interior of a building, e.g., between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases, one or more viewing (e.g., tintable) windows can be used in automobiles, trains, aircraft, and other vehicles, e.g., in lieu of a passive and/or non-tinting window.

In some embodiments, the tintable window comprises an electrochromic device (referred to herein as an “EC device” (abbreviated herein as ECD), or “EC”). An EC device may comprise at least one coating that includes at least one layer. The at least one layer can comprise an electrochromic material. In some embodiments, the electrochromic material exhibits a change from one optical state to another, e.g., when an electric potential is applied across the EC device. The transition of the electrochromic layer from one optical state to another optical state can be caused, e.g., by reversible, semi-reversible, or irreversible ion insertion into the electrochromic material (e.g., by way of intercalation) and a corresponding injection of charge-balancing electrons. For example, the transition of the electrochromic layer from one optical state to another optical state can be caused, e.g., by a reversible ion insertion into the electrochromic material (e.g., by way of intercalation) and a corresponding injection of charge-balancing electrons. Reversible may be for the expected lifetime of the ECD. Semi-reversible refers to a measurable (e.g., noticeable) degradation in the reversibility of the tint of the window over one or more tinting cycles. In some instances, a fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly bound up in the electrochromic material (e.g., and thus the induced (altered) tint state of the window is not reversible to its original tinting state). In various EC devices, at least some (e.g., all) of the irreversibly bound ions can be used to compensate for “blind charge” in the material (e.g., ECD).

In some implementations, suitable ions include cations. The cations may include lithium ions (Li+) and/or hydrogen ions (H+) (i.e., protons). In some implementations, other ions can be suitable. Intercalation of the cations may be into an (e.g., metal) oxide. A change in the intercalation state of the ions (e.g., cations) into the oxide may induce a visible change in a tint (e.g., color) of the oxide. For example, the oxide may transition from a colorless to a colored state. For example, intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide (WO3-y (0<y≤˜0.3)) may cause the tungsten oxide to change from a transparent state to a colored (e.g., blue) state. EC device coatings as described herein are located within the viewable portion of the tintable window such that the tinting of the EC device coating can be used to control the optical state of the tintable window.

FIG. 13 shows an example of a schematic cross-section of an electrochromic construct 1300 in accordance with some embodiments. The EC device coating is attached to a substrate 1302, a transparent conductive layer (TCL) 1304, an electrochromic layer (EC) 1306 (sometimes also referred to as a cathodically coloring layer or a cathodically tinting layer), an ion conducting layer or region (IC) 1308, a counter electrode layer (CE) 1310 (sometimes also referred to as an anodically coloring layer or anodically tinting layer), and a second TCL 1314. Elements 1304, 1306, 1308, 1310, and 1314 are collectively referred to as an electrochromic stack 120. A voltage source 1316 operable to apply an electric potential across the electrochromic stack 1320 effects the transition of the electrochromic coating from, e.g., a clear state to a tinted state. In other embodiments, the order of layers is reversed with respect to the substrate. That is, the layers are in the following order: substrate, TCL, counter electrode layer, ion conducting layer, electrochromic material layer, TCL.

In various embodiments, the ion conductor region (e.g., 1308) may form from a portion of the EC layer (e.g., 1306) and/or from a portion of the CE layer (e.g., 1310). In such embodiments, the electrochromic stack (e.g., 1320) may be deposited to include cathodically coloring electrochromic material (the EC layer) in direct physical contact with an anodically coloring counter electrode material (the CE layer). The ion conductor region (sometimes referred to as an interfacial region, or as an ion conducting substantially electronically insulating layer or region) may form where the EC layer and the CE layer meet, for example through heating and/or other processing steps. Examples of electrochromic devices (e.g., including those fabricated without depositing a distinct ion conductor material) can be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/462,725, filed May 2, 2012, titled “ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES,” that is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, an EC device coating may include one or more additional layers such as one or more passive layers. Passive layers can be used to improve certain optical properties, to provide moisture, and/or to provide scratch resistance. These and/or other passive layers can serve to hermetically seal the EC stack 120. Various layers, including transparent conducting layers (such as 1304 and 1314), can be treated with anti-reflective and/or protective layers (e.g., oxide and/or nitride layers).

In certain embodiments, the electrochromic device is configured to (e.g., substantially) reversibly cycle between a clear state and a tinted state. Reversible may be within an expected lifetime of the ECD. The expected lifetime can be at least about 2 y, 5 y, 10 y, 15 y, 25 y, 50 y, 75 y, or 100 (y) years. The expected lifetime can be any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5 y to about 100 y, from about 2 y to about 25 y, from about 25 y to about 50 y, or from about 50 y to about 100 y). A potential can be applied to the electrochromic stack (e.g., 1320) such that available ions in the stack that can cause the electrochromic material (e.g., 1306) to be in the tinted state reside primarily in the counter electrode (e.g., 1310) when the window is in a first tint state (e.g., clear). When the potential applied to the electrochromic stack is reversed, the ions can be transported across the ion conducting layer (e.g., 1308) to the electrochromic material and cause the material to enter the second tint state (e.g., tinted state).

It should be understood that the reference to a transition between a clear state and tinted state is non-limiting and suggests only one example, among many, of an electrochromic transition that may be implemented. Unless otherwise specified herein, whenever reference is made to a clear-tinted transition, the corresponding device or process encompasses other optical state transitions such as non-reflective-reflective, and/or transparent-opaque. In some embodiments, the terms “clear” and “bleached” refer to an optically neutral state, e.g., untinted, transparent and/or translucent. In some embodiments, the “color” or “tint” of an electrochromic transition is not limited to any wavelength or range of wavelengths. The choice of appropriate electrochromic material and counter electrode materials may govern the relevant optical transition (e.g., from tinted to untinted state).

In certain embodiments, at least a portion (e.g., all of) the materials making up electrochromic stack are inorganic, solid (e.g., in the solid state), or both inorganic and solid. Because various organic materials tend to degrade over time, particularly when exposed to heat and UV light as tinted building windows are, inorganic materials offer an advantage of a reliable electrochromic stack that can function for extended periods of time. In some embodiments, materials in the solid state can offer the advantage of being minimally contaminated and minimizing leakage issues, as materials in the liquid state sometimes do. One or more of the layers in the stack may contain some amount of organic material (e.g., that is measurable). The ECD or any portion thereof (e.g., one or more of the layers) may contain little or no measurable organic matter. The ECD or any portion thereof (e.g., one or more of the layers) may contain one or more liquids that may be present in little amounts. Little may be of at most about 100 ppm, 10 ppm, or 1 ppm of the ECD. Solid state material may be deposited (or otherwise formed) using one or more processes employing liquid components, such as certain processes employing sol-gels, physical vapor deposition, and/or chemical vapor deposition.

FIG. 14 show an example of a cross-sectional view of a tintable window embodied in an insulated glass unit (“IGU”) 1400, in accordance with some implementations. It can be desirable to have IGUs serve as the fundamental constructs for holding electrochromic panes (also referred to herein as “lites” and in the singular “lite”) when provided for installation in a building. An IGU lite may be a single substrate or a multi-substrate construct. The lite may comprise a laminate, e.g., of two substrates. IGUs (e.g., having double- or triple-pane configurations) can provide a number of advantages over single pane configurations. For example, multi-pane configurations can provide enhanced thermal insulation, noise insulation, environmental protection and/or durability, when compared with single-pane configurations. A multi-pane configuration can provide increased protection for an ECD. For example, the electrochromic films (e.g., as well as associated layers and conductive interconnects) can be formed on an interior surface of the multi-pane IGU and be protected by an inert gas fill in the interior volume (e.g., 1408) of the IGU. The inert gas fill may provide at least some (heat) insulating function for an IGU. Electrochromic IGUs may have heat blocking capability, e.g., by virtue of a tintable coating that absorbs (and/or reflects) heat and light.

In some embodiments, an “IGU” includes two (or more) substantially transparent substrates. For example, the IGU may include two panes of glass. At least one substrate of the IGU can include an electrochromic device disposed thereon. The one or more panes of the IGU may have a separator disposed between them. An IGU can be a hermetically sealed construct, e.g., having an interior region that is isolated from the ambient environment. A “window assembly” may include an IGU. A “window assembly” may include a (e.g., stand-alone) laminate. A “window assembly” may include one or more electrical leads, e.g., for connecting the IGUs and/or laminates. The electrical leads may operatively couple (e.g., connect) one or more electrochromic devices to a voltage source, switches and the like, and may include a frame that supports the IGU or laminate. A window assembly may include a window controller, and/or components of a window controller (e.g., a dock).

FIG. 14 shows an example implementation of an IGU 1400 that includes a first pane 1404 having a first surface S1 and a second surface S2. In some implementations, the first surface S1 of the first pane 1404 faces an exterior environment, such as an outdoors or outside environment. The IGU 200 also includes a second pane 1406 having a first surface S3 and a second surface S4. In some implementations, the second surface (e.g., S4) of the second pane (e.g., 1406) faces an interior environment, such as an inside environment of a home, building, vehicle, or compartment thereof (e.g., an enclosure therein such as a room).

In some implementations, the first and the second panes (e.g., 1404 and 1406) are transparent or translucent, e.g., at least to light in the visible spectrum. For example, each of the panes (e.g., 1404 and 1406) can be formed of a glass material. The glass material may include architectural glass, and/or shatter-resistant glass. The glass may comprise a silicon oxide (SO_(x)). The glass may comprise a soda-lime glass or float glass. The glass may comprise at least about 75% silica (SiO2). The glass may comprise oxides such as Na₂O, or CaO. The glass may comprise alkali or alkali-earth oxides. The glass may comprise one or more additives. The first and/or the second panes can include any material having suitable optical, electrical, thermal, and/or mechanical properties. Other materials (e.g., substrates) that can be included in the first and/or the second panes are plastic, semi-plastic and/or thermoplastic materials, for example, poly(methyl methacrylate), polystyrene, polycarbonate, allyl diglycol carbonate, SAN (styrene acrylonitrile copolymer), poly(4-methyl-1-pentene), polyester, and/or polyamide. The first and/or second pane may include mirror material (e.g., silver). In some implementations, the first and/or the second panes can be strengthened. The strengthening may include tempering, heating, and/or chemically strengthening.

In some embodiments, the sensor(s) are operatively coupled to at least one controller and/or processor. Sensor readings may be obtained by one or more processors and/or controllers. A controller may comprise a processing unit (e.g., CPU or GPU). A controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least one sensor). The controller may comprise circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, socket, and/or outlet. A controller may deliver an output. A controller may comprise multiple (e.g., sub-) controllers. The controller may be a part of a control system. A control system may comprise a master controller, floor (e.g., comprising network controller) controller, a local controller. The local controller may be a window controller (e.g., controlling an optically switchable window), enclosure controller, or component controller. For example, a controller may be a part of a hierarchal control system (e.g., comprising a main controller that directs one or more controllers, e.g., floor controllers, local controllers (e.g., window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or component controllers). A physical location of the controller type in the hierarchal control system may be changing. For example: At a first time: a first processor may assume a role of a main controller, a second processor may assume a role of a floor controller, and a third processor may assume the role of a local controller. At a second time: the second processor may assume a role of a main controller, the first processor may assume a role of a floor controller, and the third processor may remain with the role of a local controller. At a third time: the third processor may assume a role of a main controller, the second processor may assume a role of a floor controller, and the first processor may assume the role of a local controller. A controller may control one or more devices (e.g., be directly coupled to the devices). A controller may be disposed proximal to the one or more devices it is controlling. For example, a controller may control an optically switchable device (e.g., IGU), an antenna, a sensor, and/or an output device (e.g., a light source, sounds source, smell source, gas source, HVAC outlet, or heater). In one embodiment, a floor controller may direct one or more window controllers, one or more enclosure controllers, one or more component controllers, or any combination thereof. The floor controller may comprise a floor controller. For example, the floor (e.g., comprising network) controller may control a plurality of local (e.g., comprising window) controllers. A plurality of local controllers may be disposed in a portion of a facility (e.g., in a portion of a building). The portion of the facility may be a floor of a facility. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a floor. In some embodiments, a floor may comprise a plurality of floor controllers, e.g., depending on the floor size and/or the number of local controllers coupled to the floor controller. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of a floor. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of the local controllers disposed in the facility. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of the floors of a facility. A master controller may be coupled to one or more floor controllers. The floor controller may be disposed in the facility. The master controller may be disposed in the facility, or external to the facility. The master controller may be disposed in the cloud. A controller may be a part of, or be operatively coupled to, a building management system. A controller may receive one or more inputs. A controller may generate one or more outputs. The controller may be a single input single output controller (SISO) or a multiple input multiple output controller (MIMO). A controller may interpret an input signal received. A controller may acquire data from the one or more components (e.g., sensors). Acquire may comprise receive or extract. The data may comprise measurement, estimation, determination, generation, or any combination thereof. A controller may comprise feedback control. A controller may comprise feed-forward control. Control may comprise on-off control, proportional control, proportional-integral (PI) control, or proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control. Control may comprise open loop control, or closed loop control. A controller may comprise closed loop control. A controller may comprise open loop control. A controller may comprise a user interface. A user interface may comprise (or operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. Outputs may include a display (e.g., screen), speaker, or printer. FIG. 15 shows an example of a control system architecture 1500 comprising a master controller 1508 that controls floor controllers 1506, that in turn control local controllers 1504. In some embodiments, a local controller controls one or more IGUs, one or more sensors, one or more output devices (e.g., one or more emitters), or any combination thereof. FIG. 15 shows an example of a configuration in which the master controller is operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to a building management system (BMS) 1524 and to a database 1520. Arrows in FIG. 15 represents communication pathways. A controller may be operatively coupled (e.g., directly/indirectly and/or wired and/wirelessly) to an external source 1510. The external source may comprise a network. The external source may comprise one or more sensor or output device. The external source may comprise a cloud-based application and/or database. The communication may be wired and/or wireless. The external source may be disposed external to the facility. For example, the external source may comprise one or more sensors and/or antennas disposed, e.g., on a wall or on a ceiling of the facility. The communication may be monodirectional or bidirectional. In the example shown in FIG. 15 the communication all communication arrows are meant to be bidirectional. FIG. 15 shows an example of a perspective view of an enclosure 1501 (e.g., building).

The controller may monitor and/or direct (e.g., physical) alteration of the operating conditions of the apparatuses, software, and/or methods described herein. Control may comprise regulate, manipulate, restrict, direct, monitor, adjust, modulate, vary, alter, restrain, check, guide, or manage. Controlled (e.g., by a controller) may include attenuated, modulated, varied, managed, curbed, disciplined, regulated, restrained, supervised, manipulated, and/or guided. The control may comprise controlling a control variable (e.g., temperature, power, voltage, and/or profile). The control can comprise real time or off-line control. A calculation utilized by the controller can be done in real time, and/or offline. The controller may be a manual or a non-manual controller. The controller may be an automatic controller. The controller may operate upon request. The controller may be a programmable controller. The controller may be programed. The controller may comprise a processing unit (e.g., CPU or GPU). The controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least one sensor). The controller may deliver an output. The controller may comprise multiple (e.g., sub-) controllers. The controller may be a part of a control system. The control system may comprise a master controller, floor controller, local controller (e.g., enclosure controller, or window controller). The controller may receive one or more inputs. The controller may generate one or more outputs. The controller may be a single input single output controller (SISO) or a multiple input multiple output controller (MIMO). The controller may interpret the input signal received. The controller may acquire data from the one or more sensors. Acquire may comprise receive or extract. The data may comprise measurement, estimation, determination, generation, or any combination thereof. The controller may comprise feedback control. The controller may comprise feed-forward control. The control may comprise on-off control, proportional control, proportional-integral (PI) control, or proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control. The control may comprise open loop control, or closed loop control. The controller may comprise closed loop control. The controller may comprise open loop control. The controller may comprise a user interface. The user interface may comprise (or operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. The outputs may include a display (e.g., screen), speaker, or printer. The methods, systems and/or the apparatus described herein may comprise a control system. The control system can be in communication with any of the apparatuses (e.g., sensors) described herein. The sensors may be of the same type or of different types, e.g., as described herein. For example, the control system may be in communication with the first sensor and/or with the second sensor. The control system may control the one or more sensors. The control system may control one or more components of a building management system (e.g., lightening, security, and/or air conditioning system). The controller may regulate at least one (e.g., environmental) characteristic of the enclosure. The control system may regulate the enclosure environment using any component of the building management system. For example, the control system may regulate the energy supplied by a heating element and/or by a cooling element. For example, the control system may regulate velocity of an air flowing through a vent to and/or from the enclosure. The control system may comprise a processor. The processor may be a processing unit. The controller may comprise a processing unit. The processing unit may be central. The processing unit may comprise a central processing unit (abbreviated herein as “CPU”). The processing unit may be a graphic processing unit (abbreviated herein as “GPU”). The controller(s) or control mechanisms (e.g., comprising a computer system) may be programmed to implement one or more methods of the disclosure. The processor may be programmed to implement methods of the disclosure. The controller may control at least one component of the forming systems and/or apparatuses disclosed herein.

FIG. 16 shows a schematic example of a computer system 1600 that is programmed or otherwise configured to one or more operations of any of the methods provided herein. The computer system can control (e.g., direct, monitor, and/or regulate) various features of the methods, apparatuses and systems of the present disclosure, such as, for example, control heating, cooling, lightening, and/or venting of an enclosure, or any combination thereof. The computer system can be part of, or be in communication with, any sensor or device (e.g., including sensor and/or emitter) ensemble disclosed herein. The computer may be coupled to one or more mechanisms disclosed herein, and/or any parts thereof. For example, the computer may be coupled to one or more sensors, valves, switches, lights, windows (e.g., IGUs), motors, pumps, optical components, or any combination thereof.

In some embodiments, the circuitry is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled to a network of the enclosure (e.g., facility comprising a building). The circuitry may comprise a driver board, or a controller. The controller may be any controller disclosed herein (e.g., timing controller, touch screen controller, and/or any controller of the (e.g., hierarchical) control system). The controller may be operatively coupled to a device ensemble. The device ensemble may comprise a sensor or an emitter. For example, the device ensemble may comprise a plurality of sensors, a plurality of emitters, or any combination thereof. The emitter may be a light (e.g., LED) or a sound (e.g., buzzer or loudspeaker) emitter. The sensor may sense any environmental characteristic of the environment (e.g., light, temperature, chemical content (e.g., of the atmosphere), or sound). The chemical content may comprise volatile organic compounds (VOCs), carbon dioxide, oxygen, carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, or humidity. The control system may be configured to control (e.g., via the network) the environment, e.g., using a building management system. The control system may be configured to control (e.g., via the network) a ventilation, heating, air conditioning, cooling, lighting, security, safety, fire, or sound system of the enclosure (e.g., facility). The control system may be configured to control (e.g., via the network) the at least one tintable window, display construct, and/or touch screen. The network may facilitate updating any of the software (e.g., non-transitory computer readable media) associated with the devices to which it is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The network may facilitate updating any of the logic (e.g., control logic) associated with the devices to which it is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The logic may be embedded in a software. The network may facilitate updating any of the data streams associated with the devices to which it is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The update may be in real-time. The network may facilitate a response time and/or update time having a delay of at most about 2 milliseconds (ms), 3 ms, 4 ms, 5 ms, 7 ms, 10 ms, or 15 ms. The network may facilitate low latency communication. The display construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window may (e.g., each) have a unique identification (alphanumeric) code. The display construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window may (e.g., each) be uniquely recognized by the network and/or control system. The display construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window may (e.g., each) be uniquely identified as a device and/or node by the network and/or control system.

In some embodiments, the device (e.g., display construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window) is communicatively coupled to the network. A third party device and/or data stream (e.g., third party media provider) may utilize a network authentication protocol, e.g., to communicate with the control system and/o with another device. The network authentication protocol may open one or more ports for network access. The port(s) may be opened when an organization and/or a facility authenticates (e.g., through network authentication) an identity of a device that attempts to operatively couple (and/or physically couples) to the network. Operative coupling may comprise communicatively coupling. The organization and/or facility may authorize (e.g., using the network) access of the device to the network. The access may or may not be restricted. The restriction may comprise one or more security levels. The identity of the device can be determined based on the credentials and/or certificate. The credentials and/or certificate may be confirmed by the network (e.g., by a server operatively coupled to the network). The authentication protocol may or may not be specific for physical communication (e.g., Ethernet communication) in a local area network (LAN), e.g., that utilizes packets. The standard may be maintained by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The standard may specify the physical media (e.g., target apparatus) and/or the working characteristics of the network (e.g., Ethernet). The networking standard may support virtual LANs (VLANs) on a local area (e.g., Ethernet) network. The standard may support power over local area network (e.g., Ethernet). The network may provide communication over power line (e.g., coaxial cable). The power may be direct current (DC) power. The power may be at least about 12 Watts (W), 15 W, 25 W, 30 W, 40 W, 48 W, 50 W, or 100 W. The standard may facilitate mesh networking. The standard may facilitate a local area network (LAN) technology and/or wide area network (WAN) applications. The standard may facilitate physical connections between target apparatuses and/or infrastructure devices (hubs, switches, routers), e.g., by various types of cables (e.g., coaxial, twisted wires, copper cables, and/or fiber cables). Examples of network authentication protocols can be 802.1X, or KERBEROS. The network authentication protocol may comprise secret-key cryptography. The network can support (e.g., communication) protocols comprising 802.3, 802.3af (PoE), 802.3at (PoE+), 802.1Q, or 802.11s. The network may support a communication protocol for Building Automation and Control (BAC) networks (e.g., BACnet). The protocol may define service(s) used to communicate between various devices coupled to the network. The one or more devices include sensors, emitters, tintable windows, display constructs, touch screen functionality, controllers, transceivers, antennas, third party media provider related equipment, personal computers, mobile circuitry (e.g., laptop, cellular phone, touch pad), and/or any other (e.g., third party) devices. The protocol services may include device and object discovery (e.g., Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has, and/or I-Have). The protocol services may include Read-Property and Write-Property (e.g., for data sharing). The network protocol may define object types (e.g., that are acted upon by the services). The protocol may define one or more data links and/or physical layers (e.g., ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, BACnet/IPv6, BACnet/MSTP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/Token-Passing over RS-485, ZigBee, and/or LonTalk). The protocol may be dedicated to devices (e.g., Internet of Things (IoT) devices and/or machine to machine (M2M) communication). The protocol may be a messaging protocol. The protocol may be a publish—subscribe type protocol. The protocol may be configured for messaging transport. The protocol may be configured for remote devices. The protocol may be configured for devices having a small code footprint and/or minimal network bandwidth. The small code footprint may be configured to be handled by microcontrollers. The protocol may have a plurality of quality of service levels including (i) at most once, (ii) at least once, and/or (iii) exactly once. The plurality of quality of service levels may increase reliability of the message delivery in the network (e.g., to its target). The protocol may facilitate messaging (i) between device to cloud and/or (ii) between cloud to device. The messaging protocol is configured for broadcasting messages to groups of devices (e.g., as described herein) such sensors, and/or emitters. The protocol may comply with Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards (OASIS). The protocol may support security schemes such as authentication (e.g., using tokens). The protocol may support access delegation standard (e.g., OAuth). The protocol may support granting a first application (and/or website) access to information on a second application (and/or website) without providing the second with a security code (e.g., token and/or password) relating to the first application. The protocol may comprise a Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) or Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) protocol. The protocol may be configured for a message rate of at least one (1) message per second (e.g., per publisher), or more messages per second (e.g., per publisher). The protocol may be configured to facilitate a message payload size of at most about 64, 86, 96, or 128 bytes. The protocol may be configured to communicate with any device (e.g., from a microcontroller to a server) that operates a protocol compliant (e.g., MQTT) library and/or connects to compliant broker (e.g., MQTT broker) over a network. Each device (e.g., target apparatus, sensor, or emitter) can be a publisher and/or a subscriber. At least one broker can handle millions of concurrently connected devices, or less than millions. The broker can handle at least about 100, 10000, 100000, 1000000, or 10000000 concurrently connected devices. In some embodiments, the broker is responsible for receiving at least a portion (e.g., all) of the messages, filtering the messages, determining who is interested in each message, and/or sending the message to these subscribed device (e.g., broker client). The protocol may require internet connectivity to the network. The protocol may facilitate bi-directional, and/or synchronous peer-to-peer messaging. The protocol may be a binary wire protocol. Examples of such network protocol, control system, and network can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 63/000,342, filed Mar. 26, 2020, titled “MESSAGING IN A MULTI CLIENT NETWORK,” which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

The computer system can include a processing unit (e.g., 1606) (also “processor,” “computer” and “computer processor” used herein). The computer system may include memory or memory location (e.g., 1602) (e.g., random-access memory, read-only memory, flash memory), electronic storage unit (e.g., 1604) (e.g., hard disk), communication interface (e.g., 1603) (e.g., network adapter) for communicating with one or more other systems, and peripheral devices (e.g., 1605), such as cache, other memory, data storage and/or electronic display adapters. In the example shown in FIG. 16 , the memory 1602, storage unit 1604, interface 1603, and peripheral devices 1605 are in communication with the processing unit 1606 through a communication bus (solid lines), such as a motherboard. The storage unit can be a data storage unit (or data repository) for storing data. The computer system can be operatively coupled to a computer network (“network”) (e.g., 1601) with the aid of the communication interface. The network can be the Internet, an internet and/or extranet, or an intranet and/or extranet that is in communication with the Internet. In some cases, the network is a telecommunication and/or data network. The network can include one or more computer servers, which can enable distributed computing, such as cloud computing. The network, in some cases with the aid of the computer system, can implement a peer-to-peer network, which may enable devices coupled to the computer system to behave as a client or a server.

The processing unit can execute a sequence of machine-readable instructions, which can be embodied in a program or software. The instructions may be stored in a memory location, such as the memory 1602. The instructions can be directed to the processing unit, which can subsequently program or otherwise configure the processing unit to implement methods of the present disclosure. Examples of operations performed by the processing unit can include fetch, decode, execute, and write back. The processing unit may interpret and/or execute instructions. The processor may include a microprocessor, a data processor, a central processing unit (CPU), a graphical processing unit (GPU), a system-on-chip (SOC), a co-processor, a network processor, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an application specific instruction-set processor (ASIPs), a controller, a programmable logic device (PLD), a chipset, a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or any combination thereof. The processing unit can be part of a circuit, such as an integrated circuit. One or more other components of the system 1600 can be included in the circuit.

The storage unit can store files, such as drivers, libraries and saved programs. The storage unit can store user data (e.g., user preferences and user programs). In some cases, the computer system can include one or more additional data storage units that are external to the computer system, such as located on a remote server that is in communication with the computer system through an intranet or the Internet.

The computer system can communicate with one or more remote computer systems through a network. For instance, the computer system can communicate with a remote computer system of a user (e.g., operator). Examples of remote computer systems include personal computers (e.g., portable PC), slate or tablet PC's (e.g., Apple® iPad, Samsung® Galaxy Tab), telephones, Smart phones (e.g., Apple® iPhone, Android-enabled device, Blackberry®), or personal digital assistants. A user (e.g., client) can access the computer system via the network.

Methods as described herein can be implemented by way of machine (e.g., computer processor) executable code stored on an electronic storage location of the computer system, such as, for example, on the memory 1602 or electronic storage unit 1604. The machine executable or machine-readable code can be provided in the form of software. During use, the processor 1606 can execute the code. In some cases, the code can be retrieved from the storage unit and stored on the memory for ready access by the processor. In some situations, the electronic storage unit can be precluded, and machine-executable instructions are stored on memory.

The code can be pre-compiled and configured for use with a machine have a processer adapted to execute the code or can be compiled during runtime. The code can be supplied in a programming language that can be selected to enable the code to execute in a pre-compiled or as-compiled fashion.

In some embodiments, the processor comprises a code. The code can be program instructions. The program instructions may cause the at least one processor (e.g., computer) to direct a feed forward and/or feedback control loop. In some embodiments, the program instructions cause the at least one processor to direct a closed loop and/or open loop control scheme. The control may be based at least in part on one or more sensor readings (e.g., sensor data). One controller may direct a plurality of operations. At least two operations may be directed by different controllers. In some embodiments, a different controller may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different controllers may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable medium cause each a different computer to direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different non-transitory computer-readable mediums cause each a different computer to direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). The controller and/or computer readable media may direct any of the apparatuses or components thereof disclosed herein. The controller and/or computer readable media may direct any operations of the methods disclosed herein.

In some embodiments, at least one display construct and associated integrated glass unit(s) are operated in coordination with one another. Control of the at least one display construct and associated tintable window (e.g., integrated glass unit(s)) may be via integration of the display construct control with control of the tintable window. For example, the display construct and the tintable glass may be operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled to the control system, e.g., via the network. Control of the at least one display construct may be via Ethernet. A tint level of the tintable window(s) may be adjusted when one or more associated display constructs are in use. The tint level of the tintable window may automatically change (e.g., darken) when the one or more display constructs are in use. Automatically changing (e.g., darkening or lightening) the tint level of the tintable window(s) may be based at least in part on outside radiation and/or display contrast. Automatically changing the tint level of the tintable window may be based at least in part on privacy (e.g., limiting an ability to see the display construct from someone outside of the facility). When the tintable window(s) is in use, a zone of tintable windows may have its tint level (automatically) altered (e.g., darkened or lightened). A zone of tintable windows may comprise a plurality of tintable windows. The zone may comprise (i) tintable windows facing a particular direction of an enclosure (e.g., facility), (ii) a plurality of tintable windows on a particular face (e.g., façade) of a facility, (iii) a tintable windows on a particular floor of a facility, (iv) a plurality of tintable windows in a particular type of room and/or activity (e.g., open space, office, conference room, lecture hall, corridor, reception hall, or cafeteria), (v) tintable windows disposed on the same fixture (e.g., internal or external wall), and/or (vi) a plurality of tintable windows that are user defined (e.g., a group of tintable windows in a room or on a façade that are a subset of a larger group of tintable windows, for example, a conference room with a display construct on one of eight tintable windows may darken the tint of eight tintable windows—the zone). The (automatic) tinting of the tintable window may be based at least in part on whether the display construct is showing active content (e.g., content intended for user viewing) or inactive content. The automatic changing of the tint level of the tintable window when the at least one display construct is in use, may be overridden by a user (e.g., by manually adjusting the tint level). A user may override the automatic tinting of the tintable window(s) using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer and/or by a similar mobile device).

In some embodiments, at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s) may be adjacent to a heat dissipation system (e.g., heater). Heat adjacent to the display construct (e.g., heat generated by the display construct, any touch screen, circuitry, power supply, adjacent sensors, adjacent emitters, and/or sun radiation (e.g., transmitted through the tintable window)) may be dissipated. The heat may be transferred via conduction, convection, and/or electromagnetic waves (radiation). The heat may be actively or passively removed. Heat may be removed via convection and/or conduction. The active heat removal may be controlled (e.g., using the control system). Active (e.g., forced) convection (e.g., fans) may create air flow to dissipate heat adjacent to the display construct(s). The air flow may be in gaps (e.g., between the tintable window(s) and the display construct(s)). One or more temperature sensor(s) adjacent to the display construct(s) and/or operatively coupled to the display construct may sense a temperature and signal to initiate forced convection when a first (high) temperature threshold is reached. The temperature sensor(s) may (automatically) shut down the display construct(s) when a second (higher) temperature threshold is reached (e.g., to prevent malfunction and/or damage). The damage may be permanent or temporary. The first temperature threshold may be of a lower temperature value than the second temperature threshold. The threshold may depend on ambient temperature. Ambient temperature may include temperature external to the enclosure in which the display construct is disposed, or temperature in the enclosure in which the display construct is disposed. Thermal heat penetrating through the tintable window(s) may be limited (e.g., via a use of low emissivity (Lo-E) glass), e.g., to reduce a thermal load on the display construct(s).

In some embodiments, an operation of at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s) includes maintenance tasks associated with the display construct(s). Control of maintenance tasks of the display construct (e.g., pixel compensation, temperature, usage and/or resetting) may be automatic (e.g., using the control system). Pixel compensation may include adjusting a brightness of a pixel in the display construct based at least in part on how that pixel has been used over its lifetime. For example, what wavelength and/or intensity the pixel emitted, and optionally for how long. For example, how frequently was the wavelength and/or intensity projected by the pixel. For example, what has been displayed by that pixel (e.g., video with motion or static display). The display construct temperature, the fan speed, the extent of display construct usage, and/or the type of display construct usage, may be monitored over time. Monitoring may by a control system. Monitoring may utilize a sensor coupled to the network (e.g., and to the control systems). The monitoring may be in situ and/or in real time while the display construct is projecting media. The control system may utilize image processing to assess the status of one or more emitting entities (e.g., LEDs or other lights) of the display construct. The sensor may comprise a camera (e.g., stills or video camera). The camera may comprise a pixel array (e.g., charge-coupled device (CCD) camera). The camera may be configured for digital imaging (e.g., CCD or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) camera). The camera may comprise a photographic plate. The camera may be sensitive to color gamut (e.g., the full range of colors visible to an average human eye). The control system may monitor the display construct continuously and/or intermittently (e.g., at predetermined intervals). The control system may record data relating to monitoring the display construct continuously or intermittently. The data may be recorded at predetermined intervals and/or when a threshold has been reached. The threshold may be thermal, electrical, and/or optical threshold. The threshold may be time dependent (e.g., temperature of over 50° C. for more than about 1 minute). The display construct adjustment (e.g., reset) may be based at least in part on such monitoring of the display construct (e.g., optical, thermal, and/or electrical) properties (e.g., depending on a time threshold). The threshold may be a value or a function (e.g., time and/or space dependent function). Space may relate to a type of enclosure in which the display construct is disposed. For example, a display construct in a conference room may have a lower error tolerance than a display construct in a corridor. The monitoring of the display construct may provide predictions regarding the life of component(s) of the display construct (e.g., pixels, electrical circuitry, filter and/or fan). Monitoring the display construct (e.g., over time) may proactively compensate for any predicted decay in components related to, or of, the display construct (e.g., pixels, electrical circuitry, filter and/or fan). Monitor and/or diagnostics of the display construct may be via a network (e.g., a network disposed, at least in part, in a skin of the facility). Monitoring and/or diagnostics of the display construct may be by a control system. Adjusting (e.g., resetting) the display construct may include (automatically and/or controllably) turning the display construct off and on. The display construct may be cycled once per time interval (e.g., every at least about 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours, or 72 hours), e.g., if the pixels of the display construct may be susceptible to malfunction (e.g., burn failures). The time interval may depend on the type of predicted failure and/or its extent (e.g., predicted failure of one pixel, or predicted failure of a group of pixels). The time interval for cycling may depend on the type of viewing of the display construct. For example, static viewing done for longer than a predetermined threshold of time (e.g., use the display construct as a sign) may increase the risk of pixel malfunction (e.g., failure). More frequent on/off cycling when the display construct is used for static viewing as opposed to video with movement, may reduce the risk of pixel malfunction in static viewing. The control system may predict (e.g., via a software module) maintenance and/or replacement of the display construct or any of its components (e.g., based on the monitored pixel status). The predictions may be based at least in part on real-time sensor measurements of an output of the display construct (e.g., as compared to an expected output). The predictions may be based at least in part on prior sensor measurements of an output of the display construct (e.g., as compared to an expected output), e.g., done in a laboratory or other test facility (e.g., fatigue tests). The predictions may be based at least in part on observation of the display construct to be maintained/replaced. The predictions may be based at least in part on observation of other display construct (e.g., a test display construct) than the one to be maintained/replaced. The predictions may be based at least in part on average pixel status, e.g., considering the irradiation profile of the display construct and/or any of its individual pixels. The control system may provide notification regarding anticipated replacement and/or maintenance. Such predictions may allow performance of proactive maintenance and/or replacement. Such predictions may allow prospective stocking of respective display constructs to be maintained and/or replaced. Such predictions may allow for timely scheduling of personnel that would perform such maintenance and/or replacement.

FIG. 18 shows an example of operations related to at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s). Control of the at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s) may be via integration of the display construct control with control of the tintable window(s). Control of the at least one display construct may be via the network. In block 1801, a tint level of at least one tintable window is adjusted when one or more associated display construct(s) is in use and/or in preparation for the display construct's usage. For example, the tint level of the tintable window(s) may automatically darken when the one or more display construct(s) is in use. Automatically darkening the tint level of the at least one tintable window may be based at least in part on (i) outside radiation, (ii) media displayed on the display contrast, (iii) type of media displayed (e.g., static or changing), and/or (iv) privacy request. Automatically darkening the tint level of the tintable window(s) may be based at least in part on privacy (e.g., limiting an ability to see the display construct from someone outside of the facility). When one or more display constructs is in use, a zone of tintable windows may have their tint level altered (e.g., darkened). A zone of tintable windows may include a plurality of tintable windows facing a particular direction in a facility, may be a plurality of tintable windows on a particular face of a facility, may be a plurality of tintable windows on a particular floor of a facility, may be a plurality of tintable windows in a particular type of room (e.g., open space, office, conference room, lecture hall, cafeteria), and/or may be a plurality of tintable windows that are user defined (e.g., a group of tintable windows in a room or on a façade that are a subset of a larger group of tintable windows, for example, a conference room with a display construct on one of eight tintable windows may darken the tint of eight tintable windows—the zone). The zone may be any zone disclosed herein. The automatic tinting of the tintable window may be based at least in part on whether the display construct is showing active content (e.g., content intended for user viewing) or inactive content. In block 1803, the automatic darkening of the tint level of the tintable window may be overridden by a user manually adjusting the tint level of the one or more tintable windows. A user may override the automatic tinting of the tintable window(s) using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad and/or a laptop computer). In block 1804, heat adjacent to the display construct (e.g., heat generated by any components related to the display construct and/or sun radiation transmitted through the tintable window) may be dissipated and passively and/or actively (e.g., controllably) removed (e.g., using automatic actuation of fans or any other heat exchangers). A temperature sensor adjacent to the display construct may sense the temperature and signal to start the active heat exchange operation (e.g., initiating forced convection) when a first high temperature threshold is reached. The temperature sensor may shut down the display construct(s) when a second higher temperature threshold is reached. Operation 1805 shows (e.g., automating) prediction and/or anticipation of maintenance task(s) of the display construct (e.g., pixel compensation, temperature, usage and/or resetting). Pixel compensation may include adjusting a brightness of a pixel in the display construct based at least in part on how much that pixel has been used, how often that pixel has been used and/or what has been displayed by that pixel (e.g., video with motion or static display). The display construct temperature, the active heat exchange intensity (e.g., fan speed) and/or the amount of display construct usage, may be monitored. The display construct adjustment (e.g., reset) may be based at least in part on the monitoring of the display construct properties. As the pixels deteriorate, they may require more current and/or voltage to produce a requested output. The display construct adjustment may comprise adjusting intensity of one or more pixels of the display construct to generate the requested output. The monitoring of the display construct may provide predictions regarding the status and/or predicted lifespan of components in the display construct (e.g., pixels, electrical circuitry, filter and/or fan). The control system may notify and/or proactively compensate for any predicted decay in components related to the display construct. Monitoring and/or diagnostics of the display construct may be via a network, which may be disposed, at least in part, in a skin of the facility. In block 1807 the display construct is optionally adjusted and/or reset. The adjustment and/or resent may include automatically turning the display construct off and on, e.g., to crease pixel lifespan and/or reduce pixel output malfunction.

In some embodiments, an operation of at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s) is based at least in part on a status of at least one display construct. A status of the display construct may be examined, monitored, and/or verified as to whether the at least one display construct is on. If the at least one display construct is not on, then a default and/or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be activated. The (e.g., on/off) status of the display construct may be periodically checked. If the at least one display construct is on (e.g., operating), then a determination may be made whether the display construct is displaying active or passive content. If the display construct is not on (e.g., not displaying media), then a default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be activated. If the display construct is displaying active content, (i) a zone of tintable windows in proximity to the display construct(s) displaying active content may be identified, (ii) may have the tint level identified of the windows in the zone (e.g., different tint level based at least in part on presence of sun radiation, sun glare and/or desired contrast) and/or (iii) may adjust the tint levels of the tintable windows in the identified zone.

FIG. 19 shows an example of control operations relating to at least one display construct and associated tintable window(s). A status of the at least one display construct is checked in block 1901. In block 1902, the control system determines whether the at least one display construct is on (e.g., at least one pixel is controllably emitting radiation). If the at least one display construct is not on, then a default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) is activated in block 1903, and the status of the display construct is periodically checked. If the at least one display construct is on, then a determination may be made whether the display construct is displaying active content in block 1904. If not, then a default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be activated in block 1903, and the status of the display construct is periodically checked. If the display construct is displaying active content, tintable window(s) in proximity to the display construct(s) displaying active content is identified in block 1905. The tintable window(s) may have their tint level identified (e.g., different tint level based at least in part on presence of sun/glare and desired contrast) in block 1906, and any tint level adjustment is made to the tintable windows in block 1907. The tintable windows may be part of the zone (e.g., and the zone may be identified by the controller), or not part of the zone. If a first tintable window coupled to a display construct is part of a zone that comprises at least one second tintable window not coupled to a display construct. The tint of the second tintable window may or may not be altered to the tint of the first tintable window. Altering tint of other windows in the zone in concert with alteration of the tint of the tintable window that is coupled with the display construct, may be predetermined, and/or determined by a user.

In some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs is connected together in a control scheme. A plurality of display constructs may be mounted adjacent to one or tintable windows. The tintable windows may be connected (e.g., wired or wirelessly), via local (e.g., window) controllers as part of a control system. The control system may comprise a distributed network of controllers coupled to a power and/or communication network. The control system can control various functions (e.g., functions of a facility (e.g., office building, warehouse, etc.)), which may include adjusting the tint of the tintable window(s) and/or displaying media content on the display construct. The display constructs may be connected (e.g., wired or wirelessly), via a display interface that may be housed in one or more housings. The display interface housing may be referred to herein as electrical-box ((E)-box) e.g., 2006. The E-Box may be operatively coupled (e.g., for power and/or communication) to the network. The network may provide data and/or power to the display constructs. A user content server may provide data through the network to be displayed on the display constructs and/or may provide data and power to the display interface via one or more connections to the display interface. The display interface may include an adapter (e.g., Ethernet adapter (e.g., RS-485-to-ethernet)) and/or the E-boxes may include native adapter (e.g., Ethernet/IP) support. The E-box may send prompts and/or respond to queries from the network. The connection of devices for data transmission may include, for example, Ethernet, HDMI, Display Port, RS-485 and/or other types of connections for data and/or media transmission. Power may be provided to the E-boxes via power-over-internet and/or via separate power cables. The plurality of display constructs may show different content on each display construct, may show the same (e.g., duplicate) content, or may be configured to show one image across multiple display constructs (e.g., such that a section of the image with be shown on each of the plurality of display construct). The connection of display constructs may allow for small numbers (e.g., at most 10, 9, 8, 5, 6, or 4) of display constructs to be controlled via a local controller. In some embodiments, a larger number (e.g., more than 10) display constructs may be coupled via a network (e.g., floor) controller or may allow for all display constructs in a facility to be controlled by a main controller. The display constructs may display media individually (e.g., independent of other display constructs) or a group of display constructs (e.g., at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 25, 50, or 75 display constructs may be arranged in a group (set) of displays), e.g., that may be controlled to display data as if a single display construct (e.g., one media that is respectively parceled among the displays in a display group). The display constructs may form a video wall. The video wall may comprise a plurality of display construct tiled together (e.g., contiguously, or overlapped), in order to form one large screen. The controller controlling the video wall controller may parcel a single image to be projected on the video wall into parts to be displayed on individual display constructs that constitute the video wall. Display constructs may be coupled to a wall (e.g., opaque or transparent), or to a tintable window. The video wall controller may comprise hardware-based controller, or software-based & media-card controller. The hardware based controller may comprise media processing chipsets and may be devoid of an operating system. The software-based & media-card controller may be disposed in a processor having an operating system. The processor may be a server or may be local. The processor may be configured with multiple-output graphic cards and/or video capture input cards.

The display constructs may be configured in layouts. The layouts may comprise matrix grid layouts (e.g., 2×2, 3×3, or 4×4.) of identical display geometries (e.g., having the same aspect ratio). The layouts can comprise layouts of non-identical display geometries (e.g., having different aspect ratios), e.g., in configurations other than symmetrical matrixes. The media content in displayed may be identical, parceled, or entirely different. For example, at least two different parallel contents may be displayed on the video wall of the display constructs.

FIG. 20 shows an example of a control scheme for a plurality of display constructs. A plurality of display constructs 2002 may be mounted adjacent to a plurality of tintable windows 2003. The tintable windows 2003 may be connected (e.g., wired and/or wirelessly) 2009, via local (window) controllers 2001, to a control network 2004 that controls various functions of a facility (e.g., office building, warehouse, etc.), which may include adjusting the tint of the tintable windows 2003. The display constructs 2002 may be connected (e.g., wired and/or wirelessly) 2010, via a display interface 2005 and controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2006, to control network 2004 (comprising the control system). The control network may be couple via wiring network to the tintable windows and/or display construct, which wiring (e.g., coaxial cables) may provide data and/or power to the display constructs 2002. A user content server 2007 may provide data (e.g., through the wiring and/or control network) to be displayed on the display constructs 2002 and/or may provide data and power to the display interface 2005 via one or more connections 2011 to the display interface 2005. The display interface may include an Ethernet adapter (e.g., RS-485-to-ethernet). The E-boxes 2006 may include native Ethernet/IP support. The E-boxes 2006 may send prompts and/or respond to queries from the network 2004. The connection of devices for data transmission may include, for example, Ethernet, HDMI, Display Port, RS-485 and/or other types of connections for data transmission. Power may be provided to the E-boxes 2006 via power-over-internet and/or via separate power cables. The plurality of display constructs 2002 may show different content, the same content, or may be employed to show one image across multiple display constructs 2002 (e.g., as in a video wall).

In some embodiments, a display construct is utilized to display various media in a facility. The display construct may include one or more media displays that may be at least partially transparent, e.g., when the display construct is not operating (e.g., TOLED display). The display construct may be coupled to (e.g., directly or indirectly) to a hard surface such as a wall, a board, or a window (e.g., vision window). The hard surface may be of a fixture. The window may be a tintable window (e.g., an electrochromic window). The window may be disposed in the building, or in an envelope of the building. The vision window may comprise a tintable window that includes an electrochromic widow that can tint (e.g., darken, lighten, and/or alter its color (e.g., hue)), which can provide a background for contrasting the media displayed by the display construct.

In some embodiments, one or more display constructs may be operatively coupled (e.g., mounted) to the hard surface (e.g., window, wall, or board). The coupling may be via a hinge, adhesive, fasteners, and/or by other suitable mechanisms. The coupling may be at least partially disposed within one or more window frame portions. The window frame(s) may include vertical portions (e.g., mullions) and may include horizontal portions (e.g., transoms). The display construct may be directly adhered (e.g., using an adhesive) to the hard surface. The adhesive may or may not contact the window frame (or portion thereof). The hard surface may comprise of a hardened material (e.g., glass, metal, or polymer). The hard surface may comprise a solid (e.g., gypsum, ceramic, concrete and/or stone). Multiple display constructs may be mounted (e.g., via a hinge, adhesive, fasteners, and/or by other mechanism).

In some embodiments, the display construct is controlled by at least one controller. The controller may be part of the control system. The controller may comprise a controller than directly couples (e.g., connects) to the display construct. The connection between the controller and the display construct may be using wired and/or wireless communication. The controller may be coupled to the display construct via a plurality of wiring (e.g., for communication and/or power). The controller may be disposed in a housing. The housing may comprise one or more materials. The material may include elemental metal, metal alloy, polymer (e.g., plastic), resin, wood, glass, composite and/or other materials. The materials may comprise transparent or opaque materials. The material may comprise conductive or insulating (e.g., dielectric) material. The housing may comprise a dispersing or specular material. The housing may have a plurality of faces. At least two (e.g., all) of the plurality of the wiring may extend from one face of the plurality of faces of the controller housing. At times, one controller housing (e.g., comprising one or more controllers) may be coupled to a plurality of display construct. At times, one controller may be (e.g., directly) operatively coupled to one display construct. At times, one controller may be (e.g., directly) operatively coupled to two or more display constructs. Direct coupling may comprise a wire that connects the controller and the display construct. The wire may be an uninterrupted wire. The controller and/or housing may comprise wiring inlets. The wiring inlets may or may not be in the same face as the wiring outlets in the controller housing. At times, a plurality of control housings may be disposed adjacent to each other (e.g., contact each other, or may be directly coupled to each other (e.g., via wiring). At least two of the wiring (e.g., all of the wiring) connecting the controller(s) in at least two different housings (e.g., all of the housings) with at least two (e.g., all) of the display constructs (e.g., in a set of display constructs), may extend (i) from the same face type of the housings and/or (ii) to the same general direction (e.g., upwards, downwards, left, or right). The face type may be assigned according to the direction in which the face faces (e.g., downward face, upward face, eastward face, westward face, northward face, eastward face, or any combination thereof). The directions may be relative to a user facing the display construct, and relative to a gravitational center.

In some embodiments, the controller housing is mounted in a frame portion. The controller housing may be mounted within at least a portion of the window, board, or wall frame. The portion of the frame may be an upper horizontal mullion(s) (transom(s)), within lower horizontal mullion(s) (transom(s)), and/or within the vertical (side) mullions, or a combination of the mullions that form the window frame(s). Upper and lower are relative to the gravitational center. Display connectors may connect a controller to a display construct via one or more cables and/or wires. The display connectors connecting controllers to respective display constructs, which may be via cables, may extend from one face of the plurality of faces of the controller housing or may extend from more than one face of the plurality of faces of the controller housing. At least two (e.g., all) of the cables that connect the controllers to the corresponding display constructs may be (e.g., substantially) of the same length. The cable may extend at least partially within the window frame(s). The cables that connect the controller to the display construct may be of different lengths. The cable may extend at least partially within and/or outside of the window frame(s). The (e.g., local) controller may include power supply connector that may connect, e.g., to one or more electric power supply. Power supply connectors may be disposed in the same face or in a different face from the face from which the data cables to the display construct(s) extend from. The different faces may form an angle, the angle may be (e.g., substantially) a right angle. The different faces may be parallel to each other. Data (e.g., communication and/or media) cable(s) may connect from one or more sources of data (e.g., server(s)) to the controllers. The data cables may connect to a media content provider server and/or a server that controls a level of tint of the window(s). In some embodiments, the power and data are coupled to the display construct via the same cable (e.g., coaxial cable).

In some embodiments, a plurality of devices (e.g., including a sensor and/or emitter) is integrated into a common housing. The housing may include one or more circuit boards. The housing may integrate an ensemble of devices. The ensemble may have a single housing (e.g., cover). One or more circuit boards (e.g., printed circuit boards PCB) may be disposed in the single housing. At least one controller may be disposed in the housing. The housing may be adapted to mount to a window, wall, ceiling, or any other structure and/or fixture in an enclosure (e.g., a facility, building, or room) to perform various functions. The common assembly of devices (e.g., the ensemble of devices) may include power conditioning components, circuitry (e.g., a processing unit), memory, and/or a network interface. The housing may comprise mounting adapters that can be provided for installing an assembly to at least a portion of a fixture such as a window mullion. The housing may comprise one or more features desirable for optimal performance, such as (I) one or more opening for admitting external environmental characteristic(s) into the housing, (II) electrical and/or electromagnetic (e.g., radio frequency) shielding, and/or (Ill) heat exchangers (e.g., passive or active). For example, the housing may comprise one or more openings (e.g., holes) that facilitate air flow past the circuit board. The housing may comprise a heat sink. The heat exchangers and/or shields may shield the circuitry from external influences and/or may shield between the circuit boards encapsulated in the housing. The housing may comprise an open body and a lid. The lid may comprise the one or more openings (e.g., holes). The lid may snap into the open body to close the casing. The housing may comprise openings for receiving cabling.

FIG. 21A shows an example of a hard surface 2101 (e.g., a tintable window) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within a frame 2102. The frame 2102 includes mullions 2103 a and 2103 b that are vertical, and transoms 2104 a and 2104 b (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Two display constructs 2105 a and 2105 b are mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within the frame 2102 and cover (e.g., all of) the viewable surface of hard surface 2101 (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as a tintable window). Two controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E-)boxes) 2106 a and 2106 b are mounted in a portion of the frame 2102 within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2100 is pointing to) transom 2104 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2106 a (e.g., including timing controller, network communication (e.g., router), and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2109 a to display construct 2105 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2106 b is connected via wiring 2109 b to display construct 2105 b. The display connectors 2108 a extend from the housings 2106 a in the same downward direction. The display connectors 2108 b extend from the housings 2106 b in the same downward direction. The connectors 2108 a and 2108 b are arranged to point to the same downward direction. The cables 2109 a and are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2106 a and 2106 b to the respective display constructs 2105 a and 2105 b, and extend within a portion of the frame 2102. E-box 2106 a is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2110 a. E-box 2106 b is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2110 b. At least one power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry can connect its own power supply sources. At least two power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry can connect one power supply source. FIG. 21A shows an example in which two power supply cables 2110 a and 2110 b connect to the same power supply source 2111. The power supply cables 2110 a and 2110 b extend from each of the E-boxes (e.g., substantially) perpendicular to the direction that the display connectors 2108 a and 2108 b extend from the E-boxes (e.g., the connectors extend to the same side of the E-box). Media wiring 2112 a connect from a source of data (e.g., server) to the circuitry housed in the E-box (e.g., media circuitry board) 2106 b. Media wiring 2112 b is connected to E-box 2106 a and (via E-box 2106 b) to cable 2112 a and to the source of data 2115. The media cables 2112 a and 2112 b can connect to a media content provider server. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surface 2101 is a tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-box may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of this window, e.g., via the media cables (e.g., 2112 a and/or 2112 b) or via dedicated cables (not shown in FIG. 21A).

FIG. 21B shows an example of a hard surface 2121 (e.g., a tintable window) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within a frame 2122. The frame 2122 includes mullions 2123 a and 2123 b that are vertical, and transoms 2124 a and 2124 b (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display constructs 2125 a, 2125 b, 2125 c and 2125 d are mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within the frame 2122 and cover all of the viewable surface of hard surface 2121 (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as a tintable window). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2126 a, 2126 b, 2126 c and 2126 d are mounted in a portion of the frame 2122 within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2120 is pointing to) transom 2124 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2126 a (e.g., including timing controller, network and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2129 a to display construct 2125 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2126 b is connected via wiring 2129 b to display construct 2125 b. The circuitry in E-Box 2126 c (e.g., including timing controller and media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2129 c to display construct 2125 c. The circuitry in E-Box 2126 d is connected via wiring 2129 d to display construct 2125 d. The display connectors 2128 a extend from the housings 2126 a in the same downward direction. The display connectors 2128 b extend from the housings 2126 b in the same downward direction. The display connectors 2128 c extend from the housings 2126 c in the same downward direction. The display connectors 2128 d extend from the housings 2126 d in the same downward direction. The connectors 2128 a, 2128 b, 2128 c and 2128 d are arranged to point to the same downward direction. The cables 2129 a and are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2126 a, 2126 b, 2126 c and 2126 d to the respective display constructs 2125 a, 2125 b, 2125 c and 2125 d, and extend within a portion of the frame 2102. E-box 2126 a is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130 a. E-box 2126 b is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130 b. E-box 2126 c is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130 c. E-box 2126 d is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130 d. At least one power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry can connect its own power supply sources. At least two or more power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry can connect one power supply source. FIG. 21B shows an example in which four power supply cables 2130 a, 2130 b, 2130 c and 2130 d connect to the same power supply source 2131. The power supply cables 2130 a, 2130 b, 2130 c and 2130 d extend from each of the E-boxes (e.g., substantially) perpendicular to the direction that the display connectors 2128 a, 2128 b, 2128 c and 2128 d extend from the E-boxes. Media wiring 2132 a connect from a source of data (e.g., server) to the circuitry housed in the E-box (e.g., media circuitry board) 2126 d. Media wiring 2132 b is connected to E-box 2126 c and (via E-box 2126 d) to cable 2132 a and to the source of data 2135. Media wiring 2132 c is connected to E-box 2126 b and (via E-boxes 2126 d and 2126 c) to cable 2132 a and to the source of data 2135. Media wiring 2132 d is connected to E-box 2126 a and (via E-boxes 2126 d, 2126 c and 2126 b) to cable 2132 a and to the source of data 2135. The media cables 2132 a, 2132 b, 2132 c and 2132 d can connect to a media content provider server. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surface 2121 is a tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-box may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of this window, e.g., via the media cables (e.g., 2132 a, 2132 b, 2132 c and/or 2132 d) or via dedicated cables (not shown in FIG. 21B).

FIG. 22A shows an example of hard surfaces 2221 a and 2221 b (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2222 a and 2222 b. The frames 2222 a and 2222 b include mullions 2223 that are vertical, and transoms 2224 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Two display constructs 2225 a, 2225 b are mounted within frame 2222 a, and two display constructs 2225 c and 2225 d are mounted within the frame 2222 b and cover all of the viewable surface of hard surfaces 2221 a and 2221 b (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2226 a, 2226 b, 2226 c and 2226 d are mounted in a portion of the frames 2222 a and 2222 b within the vertical side (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2220 is pointing to) mullions 2223. The circuitry in E-Box 2226 a (e.g., including timing controller and media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2229 a to display construct 2225 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2226 b is connected via wiring 2229 b to display construct 2225 b. The circuitry in E-Box 2226 c (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2229 c to display construct 2225 c. The circuitry in E-Box 2226 d is connected via wiring 2229 d to display construct 2225 d. The display connectors 2228 a, 2228 b, 2228 c and 2228 d extend from the respective housings 2226 a, 2226 b, 2226 c and 2226 d in the same horizontal direction. The connectors 2228 a, 2228 b, 2228 c and 2228 d are arranged to point to the same horizontal direction. The cables 2229 a, 2229 b, 2229 c, and 2229 d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2226 a, 2226 b, 2226 c and 2226 d to the respective display constructs 2225 a, 2225 b, 2225 c and 2225 d, and extend within portions of the frames 2222 a and 2222 b. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2221 a and 2221 b are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.

FIG. 22B shows an example of hard surfaces 2231 a and 2231 b (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2232 a and 2232 b. The frames 2232 a and 2232 b include mullions 2233 that are vertical, and transoms 2234 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). A display construct 2235 a is mounted within frame 2232 a, and a display construct 2235 b is mounted within the frame 2232 b and cover all of the viewable surface of hard surfaces 2231 a and 2231 b (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Two controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2236 a and 2236 b are mounted in a portion of the frames 2232 a and 2232 b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2230 is pointing to) transom 2234. The circuitry in E-Box 2236 a (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2239 a to display construct 2235 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2236 b is connected via wiring 2239 b to display construct 2235 b. The display connectors 2238 a and 2238 b extend from the respective housings 2236 a and 2236 b in the same downward direction. The connectors 2238 a and 2238 b are arranged to point to the same downward direction. The cables 2239 a and 2239 b are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2236 a and 2236 b to the respective display constructs 2235 a and 2235 b, and extend within portions of the frames 2232 a and 2232 b. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2231 a and 2231 b are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.

FIG. 23 shows an example of hard surfaces 2321 a, 2321 b and 2321 c (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge such as 2370 and/or adhesive) within frames 2322 a, 2322 b and 2322 c. The frames 2322 a, 2322 b and 2322 c include mullion 2323 that is vertical, and transoms 2324 (also referred to as horizontal mullion). Four display constructs 2325 a, 2325 b, 2325 c and 2325 d are mounted within frame 2322 a, two display constructs 2325 e and 2325 f are mounted within the frame 2322 b, and two display constructs 2325 g and 2325 h are mounted within frame 2322 c and may cover (e.g., substantially) all (or only a portion) of the viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2321 a, 2321 b and 2321 c (e.g., visible surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). For example, surface 2380 of the tintable window is not covered by a display construct. Four controllers housed within housings (E-boxes) 2326 a, 2326 b, 2326 c and 2326 d are mounted in a portion of the frame 2322 a within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2320 is pointing to) mullions 2323. The circuitry in E-Box 2326 a is connected via wiring 2329 a to display construct 2325 a. The wiring may be configured to transmit data and/or power (e.g., to the touch screen). The circuitry in E-Box 2326 b is connected via wiring 2329 b to display construct 2325 b. The circuitry in E-Box 2326 c is connected via wiring 2329 c to display construct 2325 c. The circuitry in E-Box 2326 d is connected via wiring 2329 d to display construct 2325 d. The display connectors 2328 a, 2328 b, 2328 c and 2328 d extend from the respective housings 2326 a, 2326 b, 2326 c and 2326 d in the same downward direction. The connectors 2328 a, 2328 b, 2328 c and 2328 d are arranged to point to the same downward direction. The cables 2329 a, 2329 b, 2329 c, and 2329 d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2326 a, 2326 b, 2326 c and 2326 d to the respective display constructs 2325 a, 2325 b, 2325 c and 2325 d, and extend within portions of the frames 2322 a. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2321 a, 2321 b and 2321 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows. A controller housed within a housing 2330 is mounted in a portion of the frame 2322 b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2320 is pointing to) mullions 2323. The circuitry in controller 2330 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2329 e to display construct 2325 e. The circuitry in controller 2330 is connected via wiring 2329 f to display construct 2325 f. The circuitry in controller 2330 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2329 g to display construct 2325 g. The circuitry in controller 2330 is connected via wiring 2329 h to display construct 2325 h. The cables 2329 e, 2329 f, 2329 g, and 2329 h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2330 to the respective display constructs 2325 e, 2325 f, 2325 g and 2325 h, and extend within portions of the frames 2322 b and 2322 c. The controllers 2330 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2321 a, 2321 b and 2321 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the controller may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.

FIG. 24 shows an example of hard surfaces 2421 a, 2421 b and 2421 c (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2422 a, 2422 b and 2422 c. The frames 2422 a, 2422 b and 2422 c include mullions 2423 that are vertical, and transoms 2424 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display constructs 2425 a, 2425 b, 2425 c and 2425 d are mounted within frame 2422 a, two display constructs 2425 e and 2425 f are mounted within the frame 2422 b, and two display constructs 2425 g and 2425 h are mounted within frame 2422 c and may cover all (or only a portion) of the viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2421 a, 2421 b and 2421 c (e.g., visible surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2426 a, 2426 b, 2426 c and 2426 d are mounted in a portion of the frame 2422 a within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2420 is pointing to) mullions 2423. The circuitry in E-Box 2426 a (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2429 a to display construct 2425 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2426 b is connected via wiring 2429 b to display construct 2425 b. The circuitry in E-Box 2426 c (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2429 c to display construct 2425 c. The circuitry in E-Box 2426 d is connected via wiring 2429 d to display construct 2425 d. The cables 2429 a, 2429 b, 2429 c, and 2429 d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2426 a, 2426 b, 2426 c and 2426 d to the respective display constructs 2425 a, 2425 b, 2425 c and 2425 d, and extend within portions of the frames 2422 a. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2421 a, 2421 b and 2421 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows. A controller housed within a housing 2430 is mounted in a portion of the frame 2422 b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2420 is pointing to) mullions 2423. The circuitry in controller 2430 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2429 e to display construct 2425 e. The circuitry in controller 2430 is connected via wiring 2429 f to display construct 2425 f. The circuitry in controller 2430 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2429 g to display construct 2425 g. The circuitry in controller 2430 is connected via wiring 2429 h to display construct 2425 h. The cables 2429 e, 2429 f, 2429 g, and 2429 h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2430 to the respective display constructs 2425 e, 2425 f, 2425 g and 2425 h, and extend within portions of the frames 2422 b and 2422 c. The controllers 2430 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2421 a, 2421 b and 2421 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the controller may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.

FIG. 25 shows an example of hard surfaces 2521 a, 2521 b and 2521 c (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2522 a, 2522 b and 2522 c. The frames 2522 a, 2522 b and 2522 c include mullions 2523 that are vertical, and transoms 2524 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display constructs 2525 a, 2525 b, 2525 c and 2525 d are mounted within frame 2522 a, two display constructs 2525 e and 2525 f are mounted within the frame 2522 b, and two display constructs 2525 g and 2525 h are mounted within frame 2522 c and may cover all (or only a portion) of the viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2521 a, 2521 b and 2521 c (e.g., visible surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2526 a, 2526 b, 2526 c and 2526 d are mounted in a portion of the frame 2522 a within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2520 is pointing to) mullions 2523. The circuitry in E-Box 2526 a (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2529 a to display construct 2525 a. The circuitry in E-Box 2526 b is connected via wiring 2529 b to display construct 2525 b. The circuitry in E-Box 2526 c (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2529 c to display construct 2525 c. The circuitry in E-Box 2526 d is connected via wiring 2529 d to display construct 2525 d. The cables 2529 a, 2529 b, 2529 c, and 2529 d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2526 a, 2526 b, 2526 c and 2526 d to the respective display constructs 2525 a, 2525 b, 2525 c and 2525 d, and extend within portions of the frames 2522 a. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2521 a, 2521 b and 2521 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows. A controller housed within a housing 2530 is mounted in a portion of the frame 2522 b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2520 is pointing to) mullions 2523. The circuitry in controller 2530 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2529 e to display construct 2525 e. The circuitry in controller 2530 is connected via wiring 2529 f to display construct 2525 f. The circuitry in controller 2530 (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2529 g to display construct 2525 g. The circuitry in controller 2530 is connected via wiring 2529 h to display construct 2525 h. The cables 2529 e, 2529 f, 2529 g, and 2529 h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2530 to the respective display constructs 2525 e, 2525 f, 2525 g and 2525 h, and extend within portions of the frames 2522 b and 2522 c. The controllers 2530 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2521 a, 2521 b and 2521 c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the controller may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.

In some embodiments, one or more controllers in housings ((E)-boxes) provides functionality to one or more display constructs. The E-box may have a cover bracket that may be secured to a mounting bracket. The cover bracket and mounting bracket may mount within a portion of a window frame and/or to other structure. The E box may have a length, width, and height. The length of the E-box may be at most 15 inch (″), 14″, 13″, 12″, 11″, or 10″. The length of the E-box may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., between about 15″ and 10″, e.g., about 12.5″. The width of the E-box may be at most 5 inch (″), 4″, 3.5″, 3″, 2.5″, 2″, or 1.5″. The width of the E-box may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., between about 5″ and 1.5″, e.g., about 3.75″. The height of the E-box may be at most 3″, 2.5″, 2″, 1.5″, or 1″. The height of the E-box may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., between about 3″ and 1″, e.g., 1.75″. The E-box may include an analog-to-digital converter circuit board, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket and mounting bracket. The circuit board may include terminals for connecting to a power supply (e.g., AC or DC electrical source) via cables, which provide electric power to the E-box, the circuit board may include at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission), which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and may include at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission), which may transmit data to another E-box. The E-box may include a controller board, which may operatively engage the circuit board. The circuit board may comprise geo-location technology such as Bluetooth, radio frequency (e.g., ultrawideband radio), or global positioning system (GPS). The controller board may include a timing controller, network components, and/or media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. The controller board may include connectors that connect to cabling, which may connect to a display construct. The cabling may transmit data between the E-box and the display construct. The connectors from the e-box to the display construction (e.g., transmitting power and/or data) may extend in the same direction from the E-box or may extend from the E-box in different directions. For example, all power connectors from the E-box to the display construct may extend to the same direction and emerge from the same side of the E-box and/or PCB disposed therein. For example, all communication connectors from the E-box to the display construct may extend to the same direction and emerge from the same side of the E-box and/or PCB disposed therein. The power connectors supplying power from the PCB of the E-box to the display construct may reside on the same PCB side as the data connectors from the PCB of the E-box to the display construct (e.g., and extend to the same direction, e.g., towards the display construct and away from the E-box). The connectors of data and/or power between the E-box and the display construct, may reside in the E-box at a first side that has an angle (is perpendicular) to a second side of that E-Box in which the connectors for the incoming power supply cables reside. The connectors of data and/or power between the E-box and the display construct, may reside in the E-box at a first side that has an angle (is perpendicular) to a third side of that E-Box in which the connectors for the incoming data and/or media communication cables reside. The connector for (i) incoming power supply, (ii) incoming data (e.g., media) communication, and (iii) power and/or data to the display construct reside, may or may not reside on one PCB. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any controllable device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network identifier (ID), e.g., for communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.

In some embodiments, a plurality of cabling extends from the E-box to the display construct. the cabling is connected via connectors to the circuitry in the E-box. The circuitry can be in one or more printed circuit boards (PCBs). The cabling may be connector to the circuit boar via connectors. The connectors may connect a plurality of wires bundled into a cable. The number of connectors may be at least 2, 4, 6, or 8. The number of connectors may be an even number. The cabling may have the same of different functionality. The functionality can include transmission of data and/or transmission of electricity (e.g., electrical power). For example, a connector may connect cabling that transmits data from the PCB to the display construct. For example, a connector may connect cabling that transmits electricity from the PCB to the display construct. The connectors may form two groups of connectors. The members of the connector groups may be identical or different. For example, a connector group may comprise a data connector and a power connector. Respective arrangement of the connector types in the groups of connectors may follow a mirror symmetry, inversion symmetry, and/or rotational (e.g., C₂) symmetry. The mirror, rotational axis, and/or inversion point for the applicable symmetry operation may be disposed between the two connector groups.

FIG. 26 shows an exploded view of an example of a controller in a housing (E-box) 2602. The E-box 2602 has a cover bracket 2603 that is secured to a mounting bracket 2604. The cover bracket 2603 has a plurality of slits 2620 (e.g., for ventilation and/or heat exchange). The cover bracket 2602 and mounting bracket 2604 may mount within a portion of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to other structure (e.g., fixture). The E-box 2602 includes an analog-to-digital converter circuit board 2605, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket 2603 and the mounting bracket 2604. The circuit board 2605 may include terminals 2606 for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cables, which provide electric power to the E-box 2602, at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission) 2607, which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission) 2608, which may transmit data to another E-box. The E-box 2602 includes a controller board 2610, which operatively engages the circuit board 2605. The controller board 2610 may include a timing controller and/or media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for (e.g., precise) coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) of the display construct. The circuit board (e.g., controller board) 2610 includes connectors (e.g., 2611) that connect to cabling 2612 a-f, which connects to a display construct. The cabling 2612 a-f may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 2602 and the display construct. For example, some of the cabling 2612 a-f can transmit data and some of the cabling can transmit power. For example, the two outer most cabling 2612 c and 2612 f can transmit power, and the four inner cabling 2612 e, 2612 d, 2612 a, and 2612 b can transmit data. For example, the two inner most cabling 2612 d and 2612 a can transmit power, and the four outer cabling 2612 e, 2612 f, 2612 c, and 2612 b can transmit data. For example, the two intermediate cabling 26123 and 2612 b can transmit power, and the four other cabling 2612 d, 2612 f, 2612 c, and 2612 a can transmit data. Two of the cabling 2612 a-f can transit power and four of the cabling 2612 a-f can transmit data. The connectors may extend in the same direction from the E-box or may extend from the E-box in different directions. In the example shown in FIG. 26 , the connectors 2611 extend in the same direction from the E-box 2602. The connectors may extend from the E-box at a right angle from the direction that the (e.g., AC) power supply cables extend or may extend at any other angle from the direction that the power supply cables extend. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any controllable device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network ID for communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.

FIGS. 27A and 27B show various views of an assembled E-box 2702 shown in FIG. 26 as an exploded view. The E-box 2702 has a cover bracket 2703 that is secured to a mounting bracket 2704. The cover bracket 2702 and mounting bracket 2704 may mount within a portion of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to other structure. The E-box 2702 may have dimensions (e.g., as disclosed herein) for fitting within a structure (e.g., a length 2730, a width 2731, and a thickness 2732). The structure may be any structure disclosed herein. The E-box 2702 includes a (e.g., an analog-to-digital converter) circuit board 2705, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket 2703 and the mounting bracket 2704. The circuit board 2705 includes terminals 2706 for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cables 2715, which provide electric power to the E-box 2702, at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission) 2707, which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission) 2708, which transmit data via cables 2716, e.g., to another E-box or to the network. The E-box 2702 includes a controller board 2710, which operatively engages the circuit board 2705. The controller board 2710 may include a timing controller and media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. The controller board 2710 includes connectors 2711 that connect to cabling 2712, which connects to a display construct. The cabling 2712 may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 2702 and the display construct. The connectors 2711 extend in the same direction from the E-box 2702.

FIG. 32 shows an example of an exploded view of an E-box 3202. The E-box 3202 has a cover bracket 3203 that is secured to a mounting bracket 3204. The cover bracket 3202 and mounting bracket 3204 may mount within a portion of a structure such as a fixture, e.g., a window frame (not shown in this figure). The E-box 3202 may have dimensions consistent with fitting the E-box 3202 into a portion of the structure or may have other dimensions that are larger or smaller than these dimensions (e.g., as disclosed herein). The E-box 3202 includes a (e.g., an analog-to-digital converter) circuit board 3205, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket 3203 and the mounting bracket 3204. The circuit board 3205 may include one or more terminal(s) 3206 for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cable(s), which provide electric power to the E-box 3202 (e.g., via a coaxial cable), at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3207, which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and at least one E-box connector (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3208, which may transmit data to another E-box and/or to the network. The E-box 3202 includes a (e.g., controller) circuit board 3210, which operatively engages the circuit board 3205. The circuit board 3210 may include a timing controller, network components, and/or media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. The circuit board 3210 includes connectors 3211 a-f that connect to cabling (e.g., 3212), which connect in turn to a display construct. The cabling 3212 may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 3202 and the display construct. The E-box 3202 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any controllable device of the facility. The E-box 3202 may have a unique network ID for communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.

FIGS. 33A through 33D show various views of an E-box. The E-box 3302 has a cover bracket 3303 that is secured to a mounting bracket 3304. The cover bracket 3303 and mounting bracket 3304 may mount within a structure or a portion of the structure (e.g., a fixture such as a window frame (not shown in this figure)). The E-box 3302 may have dimensions for mounting within the structure (e.g., having a length 3330, a width 3331, and a thickness 3332), e.g., any dimensions disclosed herein. The E-box 3302 includes a (e.g., an analog-to-digital converter) first circuit board, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket 3303 and the mounting bracket 3304. The first circuit board includes one or more terminal(s) (e.g., 3306) for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cables (e.g., comprising coaxial cable or twisted wire), which provide electric power to the E-box 3302; one or more data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3307, which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and one or more E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3308, which may transmit data to another E-box. The E-box 3302 includes a second (e.g., controller) circuit board 3305, which operatively engages the first circuit board. In some embodiments, the first circuit board and the second circuit board are one circuit board (e.g., and reside on the same or on different sides of the circuit board). In some embodiments, the first circuit board and the second circuit board are separate circuit boards, that are separated by a distance that facilitates heat exchange and/or shielding (e.g., electronic and/or electromagnetic (e.g., radio frequency) shielding). The heat exchanger and/or shield may comprise elemental metal or metal alloy. The heat exchanger may exchange heat passively and/or actively. The heat exchanger may comprise a heat pipe, a slab, or a mesh. The heat exchanger may comprise a heat sink. The second circuit board 3305 may include a timing controller, network components, and/or media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. In the example shown in FIGS. 33A-D, the second circuit board includes one or more connector(s) 3311 that connect to cabling 3312, which in turn connects to a display construct. The cabling 3312 may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 3302 and the display construct. There may be additional cabling connecting the E-box with the display construct (not shown). The E-box 3302 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any controllable device within the facility. The E-box 3302 may have a unique network ID for communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.

FIG. 34A through 34E show various view examples of circuit board 3405, which may mount to within an E-box. The circuit board 3405 may include one or more terminal(s) 3406 for connecting to AC power supply cable(s), which provide electric power to the circuit board 3405, at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3407, which may receive data for display on an associated display construct, and at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3408, which may transmit data to another E-box. The circuit board 3405 may operatively engage a controller board, which may include a timing controller and media related circuitry, and connectors that connect to cabling, which connects to a display construct.

In some embodiments, certain apparatus, non-transitory computer readable media, and/or methods described herein comprise techniques that pass gas (e.g., air) over at least one lite of a tintable window. The tintable window may comprise an insulated glass unit, e.g., a tinted electrochromic coated lite of an IGU. Passing of the gas (e.g., air) may be in order to remove heat and/or lessen the heat load on the lite, e.g., and any optically switchable device (e.g., electrochromic coating) on the substrate of the lite, and/or other components (e.g., display construct). Passing the gas (e.g., air) may be for removal of heat via, e.g., convection. The heat may be removed via conduction and/or radiation. In some embodiments, gas that has been heated by and/or through the IGU lite may be passed such as by pumping, pushing and/or suction. The flow of gas may be to the internal environment of the facility and/or to the exterior of the facility (e.g., building) having the IGU lite. For example, the heated gas may be used to warm the interior of the facility. In some embodiments, the heated gas may be used to drive a turbine to generate electricity. The electricity thus generated may be stored in a battery on the forced air window assembly.

In some embodiments, a forced gas tintable (e.g., electrochromic) window may comprise two or more vent modules in communication with an interior space between an electrochromic lite of an IGU subassembly and a third lite. In some cases, one or more of these vent modules may comprise one or more air movement devices, e.g., one or more fans, for actively moving the gas (e.g., air) through the interior space between an electrochromic lite and a third lite. In one case, the one or more air movement devices (e.g., fans) may comprise one of a blade fan, a bladeless fan, or an air pump. In some cases, one or more air movement devices from the structure and outside the forced air tintable window may be configured to feed air into one or more of the vent modules or output air from one or more of the vent modules. In certain embodiments, the vented air may be used to generate electricity by turning a turbine connected to a generator. The generated electricity may be stored in a battery, e.g., in one of the venting modules. Examples of forced air tintable windows, their usage, and control thereof can be found in PCT/US15/14453 (WO 2015/120045A1), filed on Feb. 4, 2015, titled “Forced Air Smart Windows,” which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

FIG. 28 shows an example of a display construct 2801 coupled to a fastener 2802, which display construct is framed by sensor and emitter panels, e.g., 2803. The display construct is coupled (e.g., via wiring and/or cabling not shown in FIG. 28 ) to an E-box 2811 and to a power source 2810. The E-box and the power source can be disposed adjacent to the display construct, or further away, e.g., as disposed herein (e.g., in a fixture cavity such as in window frame, or in a wall cavity). The fastener 2802 includes a hinge having a first leaf 2821 comprising a bracket, and a second leaf 2822, coupled by a knuckles and pintle arrangement. The fastener 2802 includes a gas guide 2823 (partial view shown) that facilitates directional flow of gas through a set of fans 2805 coupled to respective holes in leaf portion 2821 (partial view shown). The gas directing components is configured to attach a circuit board 2830 having connectors 2831 that connect the circuit board to the display construct 2801. The circuit board may comprise a controller and/or a driver board.

In some embodiments, a display construct includes touch screen functionality. In some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs may be arranged adjacent to each other (e.g., to form a display wall such as a video wall). The display constructs may be arranged in a matrix (also called herein group or set of display constructs). There may be a gap between two immediately adjacent display constructs. Immediately adjacent display constructs exclude another display construct therebetween. The gap may be masked or unmasked. The gap masking may comprise a flexible filler such as a transparent polymer and/or resin. The flexible filler may comprise a carbon-based or a silicon-based polymer or resin. The filler may comprise an optical grade material. The filler may polymerize and/or cure by mixing at least two components. At least one of the at least two component and/or the filler may have a viscosity of at least about 400 millipascals second (mPa*s), 1000 mPa*s, 2000 mPa*s, 3000 mPa*s, 5000 mPa*s, 6000 mPa*s, 7000 mPa*s, 8000 mPa*s, 9000 mPa*s, 10000 mPa*s, 25000 mPa*s, or 50000 mPa*s. The density of the filler may be at least about 0.9 grams per centimeter cubed (g/cm³), 0.95 g/cm³, 0.97 g/cm³, 0.98 g/cm³, or 0.99 g/cm³. The filler may have low shrinkage after curing (e.g., shrinkage of at most about 0.2%, 0.1%, or 0.5% volume per volume after curing relative to before curing). The filler may have a dielectric constant of at most about 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, or 2.9. the filler may have a dielectric constant between any of the aforementioned dielectric constants (e.g., from 2.5 to 2.9, or from 2.7 to 2.8). The filler may be optically clear (e.g., to an average human). The filler may have a pulls strength of at least 2 Kilogram force per centimeter squared (Kgf/cm²), 2.2 Kgf/cm², 2.5 Kgf/cm², 3 Kgf/cm², 3.5 Kgf/cm², 4.0 Kgf/cm², 4.5 Kgf/cm², 5.0 Kgf/cm² 5.5 Kgf/cm², or 6 Kgf/cm². The filler may have a transmittance of at least about 98%, 98.5, 99%, 99.2%, 99.4%, or 99.5% of the (e.g., visible) light. The filler may have a refractive index of at most about 1.9, 1.7, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, or 1.3, e.g., at 25° C., at 23° C., or at 20° C. For example, the filler may be a Wacker Lumisil® (WL) filler (e.g., of the WL 100, 200, or 300 series). The flexible filler may be configured to allow for expansion and/or contraction of the displays (e.g., due to temperature change). The flexible filler may be configured to bind the immediately adjacent display to each other and/or to a structure. The structure may be a tintable window, board, or wall. A mounting bracket and/or hinge may be secured to the display construct and may mount to a structure. The structure may comprise a frame or wall portion. The structure may comprise a fixture. The frame may comprise a vertical mullion and a horizontal mullion (transom). The fixture (e.g., frame) may be mounted (e.g., bonded, fastened and/or by other attachment means) to various surfaces (e.g., a wall, a board, glass internal to a facility and/or other mounting location). In some embodiments, the display construct may be directly attached to the structure (e.g., tintable window). Direct attachment may be using the polymer and/or resin. Direct attachment may be using bonding. The bonding may utilize an adhesive polymer and/or resin (e.g., as disclosed herein). The bonding material may have a state in which it is more malleable than the other (e.g., rigid) state. The rigid state may be prevalent at ambient conditions. The malleable state may be in specific controllable conditions that differ from ambient conditions. The change between malleable and rigid states may be triggered by external stimulus (e.g., heat, magnetic field, electric field, and/or chemical stimulus). For example, the filler (e.g., adhesive polymer and/or resin) may be heat sensitive. For example, the filler may be more malleable in a non-ambient condition (e.g., in a heated environment), e.g., and facilitates detachment of the display construct(s) from their supporting structure (e.g., for maintenance or exchange). Division between the display constructs and/or touch screens in the set may be masked, e.g., due to the proximity of the display constructs and lack of emitter-sensor panel between two immediately adjacent display constructs. The flexible filler may be disposed between two immediately adjacent display constructs.

In some embodiments, the display construct may be fastened to a side bracket. The side bracket may be fastened to a structure (e.g., fixture such as a frame portion or a wall). The side bracket may be secured to the display construct (e.g., via an adhesive and/or screws). The side bracket is operatively coupled to at least one pair (e.g., two pair) of an emitter panel and a sensor panel. A first sensor and emitter panel pair may be disposed orthogonal to a second sensor and emitter panel pair. The two orthogonal sensor and emitter panel pairs may facilitate operation of at least one touch screen.

In some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs is arranged to form a display construct wall. The display construct wall may or may not comprise touch screen capability. For example, at least one (e.g., all) display construct in the display construct wall may have touch screen capability. A touch screen may be facilitated by at least one pair of sensor and emitter panels. A touch screen may comprise two orthogonal pairs of sensor and emitters, e.g., arranged orthogonally (e.g., as disclosed herein). A distance between an emitter panel and its sensor panel may span one or more display constructs. The display constructs may be disposed in a matrix arrangement (e.g., in a 2×2 display constructs may form a display construct set). In some embodiments, at least one (e.g., each) display construct in the set comprises its dedicated touch screen having at least one set (e.g., two sets) of sensor and emitter panel. In some embodiments, at least two display constructs in the set comprises its dedicated touch screen having at least one set (e.g., two sets) of sensor and emitter panel. Signal from an emitter in the emitter panel travels until it reaches a sensor in the sensor panel. If a signal does not reach the sensor, then the touch screen controller may interpret such disturbance as a touch of the touch screen. Thus, the path between the emitter and the sensor should not be unintentionally disturbed.

In some embodiments, the display construct and/or set of display constructs is (e.g., substantially) planar. The tolerance for planarity variation of the display construct be limited (e.g., to facilitate operation of the sensor-emitter panels disposed adjacent to the display construct). The tolerance for planarity variation between the display constructs in the set may be limited (e.g., to facilitate operation of the sensor-emitter panels disposed adjacent to the display construct set). The variation from planarity may be stricter towards a viewer than away from the viewer. The variation from planarity may be stricter towards a side of the display construct adjacent to which the touch screen is disposed (e.g., the sensor and emitter panel are disposed). For example, the display construct can be convex toward the viewer and/or touch screen with a deviation of a predetermined distance or less. The display construct can be convex away from the viewer and/or touch screen by more than that predetermined distance. The touch screen may be configured to show display data as if a single display construct (e.g., one media that is respectively parceled among the displays in a display set such that each display in the set displays a portion of the screen image). A user may use a selector (e.g., cursor and/or a touch screen) to control the plurality of display constructs as if the set of display constructs was a single display. The tolerance may allow planarity deviation of any display construct disposed between the sensor-emitter panel by at most about 100 micrometers (μm), 300 μm, 500 μm, 700 μm, or 900 μm. The planarity deviation limit may be in the direction towards the sensor-emitter panel. The display construct may be a (e.g., slightly) concave, convex, or rippled display (e.g., within the tolerance mentioned herein). The gap between two immediately adjacent display may be at most about 0.1 inches (″), 0.2″, 0.3″, 0.4″, or 0.5″. The gap may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.1″ to about 0.5″). The display construct set may have a glass panel that is common to a plurality of displays (e.g., TOLEDS). The display constructs can each have a glass panel that is supports the display (e.g., TOLED)

FIGS. 29A-29D show examples of various display constructs including touch screen functionality. FIG. 29A shows an example of four displays (e.g., OLEDs) 2903 a, 2903 b, 2903 c and 2903 d sandwiched between a front glass 2904 (that may be tempered) that is common to the four displays and four back glass panels (e.g., 2905) that each individually supports a display. The displays together form a display construct set. The four displays in FIGS. 29A and 29B are arranged as a two by two matrix (also called herein group or set) with a gap (e.g., 2915) between two immediately adjacent displays. The gap 2915 may be masked (e.g., by a flexible filler such as a transparent polymer and/or resin disposed between the displays (e.g., to allow for expansion and contraction of the displays due to temperature and/or to bond the display constructs and/or glass panels together)). A sensor-emitter panel 2918 is secured to the display construct 2902 and mounts to a framing cap 2919. The display construct is secured with a hinge (not shown) to a structure that is a window frame 2906 having a vertical mullions 2907 and horizontal mullions 2908 (transom). The frame 2906 may be mounted (e.g., bonded) to various surfaces (e.g., a wall, a board, glass internal to a facility or other mounting location). The bonding may be with an adhesive polymer and/or resin, which may or may not have a state in which it is more malleable than the other (e.g., rigid) state, which rigid state may be prevalent at ambient conditions. FIG. 29A shows an example of a side framing cap 2910 that is configured to secure the sensor-emitter panel to the display construct 2902 a side 2920 of the display construct set, with the sensor and emitter panel configured to operate as a touch screen. The set of displays 2903 a-2903 d has two sets of sensor-emitter panels that are normal to each other, which sensor-emitter panels border the set of display constructs (rather than bordering each of the displays). The tolerance for height differences between the displays 2903 a-2903 d in the display construct 2902 may be limited (e.g., none of the displays can protrude at most a tolerance threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein) from the sensor-emitter panel towards the viewer), so that the signal from the emitter will be able to reach unobstructed the sensor on the opposite side of the display construct set (e.g., the display within the set cannot be convex toward the viewer with a deviation of more than the tolerance threshold but may be concave away from the viewer by more than the tolerance threshold).

In some embodiments, a fastener is configured to couple the display construct to a supporting structure. The display construct may or may not be equipped with touch screen capability. The supporting structure can be a fixture. For example, the supporting structure can be a frame portion of a window (e.g., tintable window). The structure can be any structure disclosed herein (e.g., a wall, an arch, a door frame, or any other structural frame). In some embodiments, the fastener comprises a hinge configured to allow swiveling (e.g., of the coupled display construct) about its axis. The fastener may comprise a movable joint (e.g., a hinge). The fastener may allow swinging of at least one of its portions about an axis. The fastener may comprise a mechanical bearing that connects two solid objects. At least one of the solid objects can swing about an axis (e.g., pin, pintle, or rod, e.g., cylindrical rod). The swinging motion may be to a limited angle of rotation between the two solid portions (e.g., hinge leaves). The angle may be at most about 270 degrees)(°, 180°, 90°, 60°, 45°, or 30°. The angle may facilitate reaching any circuitry and/or (e.g., electrical) connections coupled to the fastener. The angle may facilitate attaching and/or detaching the display construct from the fastener. The angle may facilitate attaching and/or detaching the fastener to the supporting structure. The fastener may comprise a barrel hinge, butt hinge, Mortise hinge, concealed hinge (e.g., cup hinge or euro hinge), continuous hinge (e.g., piano hinge), flag hinge, H-Hinge, HL hinge, pivot hinge (e.g., double acting hinge), self-closing hinge, spring hinge, or living hinge (e.g., devoid of knuckles or pins). The swiveling may be of the hinge leaves (e.g., any anything attached to the hinge leaves). The hinge axis may be of the same material as the fastener body (e.g., hinge leaves), or of a different material. For example, the hinge axis can be of a harder material as compared to the hinge body (e.g., hinge leaves). The hinge axis and/or leaves can comprise metal (e.g., comprise elemental metal or metal alloy). The fastener may include knuckles and/or an axis (e.g., a pin). At least one hinge leaf (e.g., each of the two hinge leaves) may comprise a second class lever or a third class lever that pivots about a fulcrum disposed at one of its sides. The fulcrum is the point on which the lever rests and/or is supported, and about which the lever pivots (e.g., the hinge axis). For example, the hinge leaf may pivot about a fulcrum disposed at the hinge axis. In a second class lever, the load is located between the fulcrum and the input force. In a third class lever, the input force is between the fulcrum and the load. The leaf may extend from a set of knuckles that hold the hinge axis. For example, the fastener may comprise two sets of knuckles and/or two pins. The knuckles may be part of the leaf of the fastener (e.g., an integral part of the leaf, made of the same material piece). Any part of the hinge may comprise a composite material (e.g., comprising carbon fiber). The hinge may comprise a ceramic material. The hinge may be made of a heat conductive material such as metal (e.g., copper and/or aluminum). The metal may comprise an elemental metal or a metal alloy. The hinge axis (e.g., pintle) can be of a durable material. The durable material may comprise stainless steel, titanium, plane steel, iron, Inconel, Hastelloy, Waspaloy, Rene alloy, Incoloy, MP98T, TMS alloy, or CMSX single crystal alloy. The durable material may comprise a superalloy (e.g., high performance alloy). The hinge (e.g., any of its components such as its axis (e.g., pintle)) can comprise the durable material (e.g., superalloy). The knuckle of the hinge may have a hollow cylindrical cavity (e.g., having a circular cross section). The cavity may form the joint of the hinge through which the hinge axis is set. The knuckles of either leaf can alternate and interlock with the axis (e.g., pintle) passing through the knuckles. The knuckle can form a closed cylindrical cavity. The knuckle can form an open cavity. FIG. 37 shows an example of a hinge leaf 3721 having knuckle (e.g., 3781) that forms an open cavity configure to accommodate the hinge axis 3720. The open cavity of the knuckle facilitates attachment and/or detachment of its leaf (e.g., 3721) from the axis. In the knuckle example having an open cavity, the knuckle may separate from the pintle by (i) moving the knuckles away from the pintle in a direction normal to the pintle (e.g., and in the direction opposite to the chuckle cavity opening (e.g., 3782) that extends along the pintle axis, and/or (ii) extracting the pintle by moving it along its axis. FIG. 36 shows an example of a knuckle 3682 having a closed cylindrical cavity through which axis (e.g., pintle) 3620 traverses. In a closed knuckle example, the pintle may be able to move (i) along its axis (e.g., 3683) and in a circular motion about its axis. In a closed knuckle scenario, the knuckle may detach from the pintle by extracting the pintle by moving it along its axis (e.g., 3683).

In some embodiments, a plane of the hinge leaf face is (e.g., substantially) planar. In some embodiments, a plane of the hinge leaf face is devoid of curvature (e.g., concave, convex, or rippled). FIG. 40 shows perspective view examples of hinge leaf 4021 having a planar hinge leaf face surface 4021 a. FIG. 41 shows an example of hinge leaf 4122 having a planar hinge leaf face surface 4122 a (partial view shown).

In some embodiments the fastener is configured to accommodate various components. The fastener (e.g., comprising the hinge) may be configured to accommodate one or more circuitry boards. For example, the fastener may be configured to accommodate a circuit board comprising a booster and/or driver board for the display to which it is configured to connect to. For example, the fastener may be configured to accommodate a circuit board of the touch screen functionality (e.g., sensor and emitter panels). The fastener may be configured to allow easy installation, removal, and/or maintenance (e.g., as disclosed herein). Easy may refer to low labor cost, low labor grade (e.g., low labor qualification), and/or short labor time. At least one of the hinge leaves can comprise an opening through which at least a portion of the circuitry (e.g., PCB) is viewable and/or accessible. At least one of the hinge leaves may be configure to facility viewing, access to, and/or manipulation of, at least one connector. For example, at least some of the connectors in the circuitry (or coupled to the circuitry) can be viewable, accessible, and/or manipulatable through the opening. For example, at least some of the connectors between the circuitry and the display construct can be viewable and/or accessible through the opening. The opening may facilitate removal of cable(s) coupled to the connector. The opening may facilitate attachment and detachment of the cables, e.g., for maintenance, replacement, and/or removal (e.g., of the cabling, of the circuitry, and/or of the display construct). The fastener may snap and/or be screwed to the structure. The circuit board may engage (e.g., via a snap fit) into the fastener, attached to the fastener (e.g., using an adhesive), or snap to the fastener. At times, the display construct may require replacement before replacement of any portion of the support structure (e.g., and/or tintable glass) to which it is coupled. The fastener may or may not have magnetic components. The fastener may be coupled to a supporting structure. The fastener may or may not be attached to a window. The fastener may or may not be bolted into a window (e.g., using through holes in the window). In some embodiments, the fastener is not directly coupled to the window (e.g., using any through holes in the window and/or using an adhesive). In some embodiments, the display construct is not directly coupled to the window (e.g., using any through holes in the window and/or using an adhesive).

FIG. 35 shows example views of a fastener 3502 that is coupled to a display construct 3501 bordered by sensor-emitter panels housed in a protective framing such as 3503 to facilitate touch screen capability. The fastener 3502 has an opening 3504 through which a portion of a circuit board 3530 can be viewed. The circuit board can incorporate a booster and/or driver board coupled with the display emitters (e.g., LEDs). The circuit board 3530 comprises six connectors 3509. The connectors can facilitate transmittance of data (including media and/or control related data) and/or power from the power source and/or E-Box (compositing the circuit board (e.g., timing controller)) to the display construct. The fastener may comprise a hinge axis 3520 coupled to hinge leaves 3521 and 3522. A first hinge leaf 3521 comprises a bracket configured to attach to the structure (e.g., frame portion). A second hinge leaf 3522 comprises the opening 3504 for the circuitry and/or connectors. Any of the hinge leaves can be made from a single piece of material (e.g., from a single slab), or can be made of portions attached together to form a single piece. Attached can comprise stitched, welded, interlocked, or screwed,

In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to extend along a side of the display construct. The fastener can comprise a single unit that extends to the at least a portion of the side length of the display construct. The single unit may be of a single material (e.g., a single slab). The single unit may or may not have one or more openings. The extension of the unit (e.g., hinge leaf) may be of at least about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 95% of the length of the display construct side. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the fastener (e.g., at least one hinge leaf) extends to the full length of a side of the display construct. In some embodiments, the fastener extends (e.g., slightly) beyond the full length of the side of the display construct. In some embodiments, the fastener accommodates the side of the display construct. FIG. 35 shows an example of fastener 3502 having a portion (e.g., hinge leaf) 3522 that extends to at least the full length of display construct 3501, which hinge leaf 3522 has an opening 3504 that facilitate access to at least a portion of the circuitry 3530 (e.g., connectors 3509 thereof) as well as a plurality of openings that facilitate air flow and/or heat exchange, which hinge leaf is formed of a single portion (e.g., single slab).

In some embodiments, the fastener may be configured to facilitate heat exchange. The fastener may be configured to accommodate any of the heat exchange devices and/or technologies disclosed herein. For example, the fastener may be configured to accommodate one or more fans for active gas (e.g., air) conduction. The fastener may be configured to accommodate at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 20 fans. The fastener may be configured to accommodate a number of fans between any of the aforementioned number of fans (e.g., from 1 to 20, from 1 to 10, or from 10 to 20). The number of fans may be an even number. The number of fans may be (e.g., evenly) distributed on both sides of the opening. The opening to the circuitry may be centered along a length of the fastener. The openings for the gas flow (e.g., and placement of the fans) may be disposed along the fastener and further away from the opening. Every two fans may be symmetrically aligned along the middle portion of the fastener length (e.g., leaf length). FIG. 35 shows an example of a fastener 3502 having a leaf with an opening 3504 centered along its length, which leaf has a plurality of openings 3505 a and 3505 b (eight openings in total) that facilitate gas exchange and accommodation of fans (e.g., 3524). The plurality of openings may be vent holes. The openings can be arranged symmetrically along the length center of the fastener and extend along the fastener leaf away from the opening. The openings in each of the opening groups 3505 a and 3505 b are distributed evenly (e.g., are evenly spaced) along the fastener (e.g., hinge leaf) portion and arranged symmetrically as two groups, with respect to the center of the fastener length. Fastener leaf 3522 is coupled to a corner 3529 configured to hold a circuit board 3597. The circuit board can be coupled to the sensor and emitter panel disposed in a protective framing cover 3503. The framing cover protects at least a portion of a transparent material (e.g., 3598) configured to allow the emitted radiation (e.g., infrared radiation) of the touch screen functionality to travel therethrough.

In some embodiments, the display construct fastener comprises a plurality of circuit boards. The circuit boards may include a booster and/or driver board, and/or at least one circuitry facilitating the touch screen functionality. For example, there could be two circuit boards facilitating the touch screen functionality. At least one of the plurality of circuit boards may be attached to the fastener. FIG. 35 shows an example of a touch screen circuitry 3597 coupled to the hinge leaf 3522 by a connective piece (e.g., L bracket 3529. An additional circuitry 3599 (e.g., facilitating the touch screen functionality) (e.g., 3599) may or may not be coupled to the fastener (e.g., to hinge leaf 3522).

In some examples, the fastener facilitates cooling and/or air flow on one side of the display construct, and touch screen functionality on the opposing side of the display construct. FIG. 35 shows an example of touch screen 3501 coupled to fastener 3502 such that an air flow 3536 is directed to the back side of the display construct 3501 that would be further away from a viewer, and a touch screen functionality (e.g., including transparent material 3598) disposed on the opposing side of the display construct 3501 that is closer to the viewer (e.g., and accessible to the viewer for touch screen functionality). The viewer is displayed schematically as figurine 3596 to designate the viewer side of display construct 3501 (e.g., which scale may be disproportional, e.g., to the display construct).

In some embodiments, the fastener may be configured to facilitate heat exchange. The fastener may be configured to facilitate active heat conduction from the external atmosphere towards the display construct (e.g., gas pushing). The fastener may be configured to facilitate active heat conduction from the display construct towards the external atmosphere (e.g., gas suction). For example, the fastener may be configured to accommodate one or more fans configured to direct gas (e.g., air) from the ambient atmosphere around the fastener, towards a designated path. The path may be designated by a directing structure. The directing structure may at least one planar and/or a curved portion. FIG. 35 shows an example of a gas directing structure 3523 having planar portions 3531 and 3532, and curved portion 3533. The gas directing structure may be formed of one piece of material (e.g., one slab), or a plurality of attached (e.g., stitched, soldered, interlocked, and/or fastened) portions. The gas directing portion may be configured to direct the gas along path 3526. FIG. 35 shows various views of a fastener and associated components. The gas may be directed from the external environment (e.g., atmosphere of the enclosure) towards the display construct, e.g., through the gas directing path (e.g., formed by the gas directing structure and/or the fastener. The gas directing structure may be part of the fastener or coupled thereto. The gas directing structure may be coupled (e.g., fastened to or be a part of) to a first leaf of the fastener. The gas directing structure may not be part of (or coupled to) the other (e.g., second) leaf. The gas directing structure may be coupled (e.g., fastened to or be a part of) to a first leaf of the fastener configured to attach to the display construct. The gas directing structure may not be part of (or not be coupled to) the other (e.g., second) leaf configured to attach to the supportive structure (e.g., fixture such as a frame portion or a wall). The supportive structure may be part of the enclosure (e.g., a fixture of the enclosure). The fans may comprise an actuator. The fans may be controlled by the controller (e.g., any controller disclosed herein). The fans may be controller locally (e.g., in the controller of the fastener and/or the E-box). The fans may be controlled remotely (e.g., by the BMS, and/or by higher hierarchy controller such as a floor controller or a master controller). The fans may be controller by a controller configured to control a sensor and/or emitter (e.g., a device ensemble).

FIG. 36 shows perspective view examples of a display construct coupled to a portion of the fastener. FIG. 36 shows an example of hinge leaf 3622 having two knuckle groups 3685 a and 3685 b. Each knuckle group has a hinge (e.g., 3620) inserted therethrough. Each knuckle group is part of a knuckle assembly forming a hinge. The knuckle groups 3685 a and 3685 b form an integral portion of the hinge leaf 3622 that has a plurality of openings arranged in two symmetric groups 3605 a and 3605 b about the center of the length of hinge leaf 3622. The hinge leaf 3622 has an egressed portion 3604 centered about the length of the hinge length. The hinge leaf 3622 is formed of a single piece (e.g., single slab, slice, strip, or plate). The hinge leaf 3622 extends along the full length of the side of display construct 3601. The display construct 3601 is devoid of a frame surrounding all its sides. The openings (e.g., 3605 c) are configured to allow gas (e.g., air) to pass therethrough from one side of the display construct 3601, e.g., along path 3626. Hinge leaf 3622 also comprises a protruding feature (e.g., boss) 3699. The ending “a” in numerals 3601 a and 3622 a designates that a portion of the respective items without the ending “a” is shown (e.g., 3601 a is a portion of display construct 3601).

FIG. 37 shows perspective view examples of display construct 3701 framed by sensor-emitter panel e.g., 3703. The display construct is coupled to a fastener 3702 having two hinge leaves 3721 and 3722. The hinge leaf 3721 is configured to couple to a supporting structure. The hinge leaf 3721 has two sets of open knuckles 3783 a and 3783 b configured to attach or detach to hinge leaf 3722, by integrating with the closed cavity knuckles 3785 a and 3785 b respectively, each holding a hinge pintle. The hinge leaf 3721 is formed in a shape of a bracket. Hinge leaf 3722 comprises an opening 3704 (e.g., carved out portion, or egress) centered along its length, which opening extends to a portion of the hinge leaf width. The opening is configured to facilitate access to a portion of any attached circuitry (e.g., booster and/or driver board) and/or connectors that would be attached to hinge leaf 3722 and/or coupled to (e.g., and communicating with) the display construct and to the E-box and power source. Hinge leaf 3722 has a plurality of openings (e.g., 3705) arranged as two groups about the length of the leaf hinge 3722. The openings in each group are evenly spaced. The openings allow exchange of gas (e.g., air). Hinge leaf 3722 is coupled to a gas directing structure (e.g., gas guide) 3723. The gas guide is configured to direct any incoming gas (e.g., air) through the openings (e.g., 3705) to one side of the display construct through cavity 3750, such that the gas will flow, e.g., in the direction depicted in broken arrows 3751 (or in a reverse direction). Portion 3732 covers (and forms) the cavity 3750, which portion 3732, 3733, and 3731 are part of the gas guide portion 3723. The ending “a” in numerals 3701 a, 3702 a, 3703 a, 3721 a, 3722 a, 3723 a, and 3733 a designates that a portion of the respective items without the ending “a” is shown (e.g., 3701 a is a portion of display construct 3701).

In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to facilitate heat exchange. The heat exchange may be active. The heat exchange may be facilitated by one or more fans, gas (e.g., air) directing component, and/or gas channel. The paths formed in the fastener for the gas flow may be designed to accommodate the flow of air without forming excessive or reduced pressure in the faster, e.g., as compared to ambient pressure. The area through which the gas is allowed to flow in the fastener may be greater that the area through which the gas flows in the fans. For example, the total horizontal cross sectional area of the fan openings (e.g., 3805) may be smaller than the total horizontal cross sectional area between the gas guide (e.g., 3823) and the plate (e.g., 3855) that together form the gas channel directing the gas (e.g., 3851) towards the outer portion of the display construct (e.g., 3801).

FIG. 38 shows perspective view examples of display construct 3801 coupled to portions of a fastener 3822 (e.g., hinge leaf) having an opening (e.g., regression, carveout, or egress) 3804 that extends to a portion of its width, which opening is centered along its length. The opening 3804 is configured to allow access to a portion of the circuitry 3830 and/or connectors thereof. Hinge leaf 3822 has two sets of knuckles 3884 a and 3884 b, and a plurality of openings (e.g., 3805) that facilitates flow of gas (e.g., air) therethrough. Hinge leaf 3822 is coupled to a gas guide 3823 that is configured to guide gas flowing through (e.g., incoming or outgoing) the openings (e.g., 3805). The gas guide is coupled to a plate 3855 having ten protrusions. The protrusions are evenly spaced along the length of the plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide 3823 to form a gas passage (e.g., between every two protrusions). The protrusions are configured to prevent bending (e.g., collapse) of the gas guide and/or the plate. The protrusions are configured to ensure that the gas passages remain operational and/or intact over time. The gas guide 3823 and the plate 3855 guide the gas in the direction depicted by the broken arrows (e.g., 3851). Gas guide 3832 (e.g., that is attached to, or as part of, hinge leaf 3822) is configured to engage with hinge leaf 3821 comprising a bracket. The display construct 3801 is framed by sensor-emitter panels (e.g., 3803) that facilitate touch screen capability. The bracket portion of the fastener can have at least one pointed end (e.g., 3821) or at least one non-pointed end portion (e.g., 3525). At least one end of the bracket may be disposed close to the gas guide, e.g., when the hinge of the fastener is in a closed position. At least one end of the bracket may or may not contact the gas guide. The fastener may be configured to allow a gas passage (e.g., and a gap) between the bracket portion of the fastener and the gas guide, e.g., when the fastener is in a closed position. FIG. 35 shows an example of a gap between the gas guide 3523 and the non-pointed bracket end 3525 of leaf 3921 of the fastener. FIG. 38 shows an example of a gap between a pointed bracket end 3825 of leaf 3821 of the fastener and its complementary portion gas guide 3823 that is part of the bent portion 3533. At least one end of the bracket may form a right angle or a non-right angle with a side of the bracket. At least one end of the bracket may have an angle and/or curvature that is complementary to the gas guide portion immediately adjacent to it, e.g., when the fastener is in a closed position (e.g., shown in the example of 3802). Hinge leaf 3822 is configured to mount a circuitry 3871 (e.g., facilitating the touch screen functionality), which mounting is by using a mounting structure that in the shape of an L bracket 3870. The mounting structure can be an integral part of the hinge leaf 3822, or may be a separate portion that is snapped, interlocked, soldered, glued, bolted, or otherwise attached to hinge leaf 3822. The ending “a” in numerals 3801 a, 3803 a, 3821 a, 3822 a, 3832 a, 3821 a, 3823 a, 3840 a, and 3855 a designates that a portion of the respective items without the ending “a” is shown (e.g., 3801 a is a portion of display construct 3801). Item 3890 is a connective piece (e.g., 4090). The gas guide can be coupled (e.g., attached) to the fastener by any attachment (e.g., coupling) method disclosed herein (e.g., snapping, soldering, gluing, bolting, interlocking, or screwing). At the closed position of the fastener, the first leaf and the second leaf (and any objects attached thereto) maintain a separation (e.g., gap) from each other (e.g., do not contact each other). The separation (e.g., gap) can be of at most about 0.2 millimeters (mm), 0.3 mm, 0.4 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1 mm, 3 mm, or 5 mm. The separation (e.g., gap) can be between any of the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.2 mm to about 5 mm, from about 0.2 mm to about 0.5 mm, from about 0.3 mm to about 1 mm, or from about 0.8 mm to about 5 mm). The gap may be between the tip of the bracket portion (e.g., 3525) of the first hinge leaf and its complementary portion that is part of the second hinge leaf (e.g., attached to or an integral part of), such as the gap guide (3.g., 3523) complementary portion (e.g., 3533) to the bracket tip portion (e.g., 3525). The ending “a” in numerals 3501 a, 3510 a, and 3522 a, designates that a portion of the respective items without the ending “a” is shown (e.g., 3501 a is a portion of display construct 3501). Item 3505 c represent a portion of fans 3505 b. The fastener and associated components are represented as a side view in 3570.

In some embodiments, the fastener is masked from the viewer by a cap (e.g., beauty cap). The cap can serve as a protective lid or cover for the fastener. The cap can mask the fastener in the supportive structure (e.g., fixture) in which it is installed. For example, the cap can mimic a portion of a framing (e.g., window framing), or a portion of a wall. The cap can be camouflaged in its surrounding (e.g., in the supportive structure). The cap can attach to the supportive structure, e.g., using any of the attachments disclosed herein, e.g., bolting, screwing, snapping, or adhering (e.g., using an adhesive). The supportive structure may be configured to facilitate such attachment (e.g., by incorporating a complementary structure to which the cap would attach to).

In some embodiments, the gas guide is configured to guide the gas along a side of the display construct. The side of the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be closest to the supportive structure (e.g., wall, tintable glass, and/or framing). The side of the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be further away from a viewer. The side of the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be opposite to a side of the display construct having the touch screen capability. The side of the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be opposition to the side along which emitters are emitting radiation as part of the touch screen functionality. FIG. 38 shows an example of a display construct 3801 having gas flow directed on one side of display construct 3801, illustrated by broken arrows, e.g., 3841, which side of the display construct is opposite to the side viewed and/or accessed by a viewer illustrated schematically by figurine 3899 (e.g., which scale may be unproportioned, e.g., to the display construct).

In some embodiments, the gas guide may be separated from a hinge leaf by a protruded feature (e.g., a boss). The protruding feature may protrude from the gas guide or from the hinge leaf. The protruding feature may be an integral part of the gas guide or hinge leaf. The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to the gas guide or hinge leaf (e.g., using any of the attachment methods disclosed herein). FIG. 38 shows an example of a protruding feature 3840 (e.g., boss) that protrudes from hinge leaf 3822. The protruding feature may offer structural support to portion(s) of the fastener.

In some embodiments, initiation of active heat exchange may be controlled by a controller. The controller may utilize a feedback control scheme. The feedback control scheme may utilize temperature data. The temperature data may derive from at least one temperature sensor. The temperature data may relate to the temperature at one or more positions of the display construct. The fastener may be configured to accommodate and/or connect to at least one temperature sensor (e.g., thermocouple or IR sensor). The at least one temperature sensor may be configured to sense a temperature of the display construct. The at least one temperature sensor may be disposed such that it will contact a side (e.g., rim) of the display construct away from the viewer, closest to the supporting structure, and/or closest to a window to which it is coupled. The at least one sensor may be disposed in a framing (e.g., sensor and emitter protective framing) and/or any portion (e.g., component) of the fastener. The control scheme may direct activation of the active heat exchange system (e.g., fans and/or cooler) when the temperature reaches first threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein). The control scheme may direct shutting off operation of the display construct when the temperature reaches a second threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein). The control scheme may direct de-activation of the active heat exchange system (e.g., fans and/or cooler) when the temperature reaches a third threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein). In some embodiments, the second threshold is higher than the first threshold (e.g., has a higher temperature value). In some embodiments, the third threshold is lower than the first threshold and/or the second threshold (e.g., has a lower temperature value). At times, the active heat exchange is always in an “on” mode, and is shut down if the temperature exceeds a threshold (e.g., the second threshold delineated herein). The (e.g., any of the higher temperature thresholds such as the second threshold) threshold may be of a temperature having a value of at least about 30° C., 35° C., 40° C., 43° C., 45° C., 47° C., 49° C., 50° C., 53° C., 55° C., or 57° C. The threshold (e.g., any of the lower temperature thresholds such as the third threshold) may be of a temperature having a value of at most about 20° C., 25° C., 30° C., 35° C., 40° C., or 45° C. The high temperature threshold may be a temperature at which the light emitting entities are likely to be (e.g., permanently) damages (e.g., burn out).

In some embodiments, the fan(s) are activated at a capacity. The fan capacity (e.g., rotational speed) may be constant, e.g., and the control may comprise turning the fans on and off. For example, when the fans are activated, they rotate at (e.g., substantially) 100% capacity. The fan capacity may vary, e.g., and the control may comprise turning the fans on and off and varying its rotational speed (e.g., by varying the power supplied to the fans). For example, when the fans are activated, they may operate at a capacity lower than 100%. For example, the fans may initially rotate at a low capacity of at most 1%, 5%, 7%, 10%, or 15% capacity. The fans may increase their rotational capacity linearly, non-linearly, intermittently and/or continuously. For example, the rotational speed of the fan(s) may ramp up. Increasing the rotational speed of the fans may depend on the temperature of the display construct (e.g., as measured by at least one temperature sensors, e.g., that is an integral part of the display construct assembly). The controller may adjust the rotational speed of the fans using a feedback control scheme. The controller may utilize sensor readings for the feedback control scheme. The sensor readings may derive from temperature and/or electromagnetic radiation sensors. The sensor(s) may be operatively coupled to the network. The sensors may be disposed in the enclosure (e.g., building) in which the display construct is disposed. The sensors may sense the temperature of the display construct and/or the internal environment in the enclosure where the display construct is disposed. The sensors may sense radiation (e.g., sun rays) emitted through the display construct and/or into the internal environment in the enclosure where the display construct is disposed. The sensors may sense temperature and/or radiation affecting temperature of the display construct directly and/or indirectly.

FIG. 39 shows perspective view examples of various portions of display construct 3901 having touch screen capability, coupled to a fastener 3902. The fastener has a hinge having a first hinge leaf 3921 and a second hinge leaf 3922, which leaves are configured to swing about an axis. Item 3980 shows a portion of the display construct bordered by a portion of the sensor-emitter panel and its housing. The fastener includes a gas guide 3923, a plurality of holes that facilitate egress and/or ingress of gas therethrough, and a first circuitry 3930. The hinge leaf 3922 has a depression 3904. The depression can be configured to facilitate access to a second circuitry and/or connectors (not shown in FIG. 39 ) configured to be coupled to the display construct and to the E-box (e.g., timing controller therein) and/or power source. The first circuitry 3930 may be disposed on (or be otherwise coupled to) a side of the hinge leaf 3922. The first circuitry may be configured to facilitate operation of the touch screen functionality, which includes sensor and emitter panels bordering the display construct, e.g., 3903. The sensor and emitter panel comprises a circuitry 3923 to which the sensors and emitters (e.g., 3922 are coupled to, a reflective surface (e.g., mirror) 3925, a protecting framing including 3924 and 3927, and transparent material 3920 configured to allow radiation from the emitters to travel therethrough (and optionally protect the circuitry from the ambient environment such as from humidity). The framing portion 3924 is configured to support the display construct 3901 above a portion of sensor and emitter assembly (e.g., above reflecting surface 3925). The protecting framing (and the components therein) extends along a side of the display construct 3901. Every two perpendicular protecting framings meet at a connection corner 3990 at an edge of the display construct 3901. The connecting corner comprises a body 3991 and a cover 3995 of the body. The body may be a single piece faceplate. The cover (e.g., corner cover) is a tripoded cover 3995. The tripoded cover has three extensions that together form the tripod. Two of the three extensions are disposed on a plane, and the third extension is disposed normal to the plane. The third extension comprises two wavy structures. The tripoded cover 3995 is configured to seal the connector of the two normal protecting frames at their meeting edge 3990. The body of the connecting corner is configured to house circuit boards 3998 a and 3998 b of the sensor-emitter circuitry. 3901 a is a portion of display construct 3901. The circuit boards are connected to each other at the corner (not shown). One of the two circuit boards is connected to the touch screen circuit board 3930. The body is configured to house an internal connector 3094 that has two curved edges, and two pointy edges forming a cross section akin to an eye or an almond. The internal connector 3994 comprises housing configured to accommodate a screw. The integral connector may be part of the single piece faceplate 3991.

In some embodiments, the framing of the display construct is configured to (i) support the display construct and (ii) separate the display construct from the sensor and emitter assembly, and (iii) protect the sensor and emitter assembly from the ambient environment. The display construct is configured to be located in a cavity that is horizontally and/or vertically within of the sensor and emitter assembly. The display construct is separated from a cavity holding the sensor and emitter assembly at least in part by a framing (e.g., 3924) and/or by an adhesive. FIG. 39 shows an example of display construct 3901 held by framing portion 3924 and an adhesive (e.g., double sided tape) that contacts the display construct with the transparent material 3920. The framing comprising 3924 and 3927 forms an internal cavity for the sensor and emitter assembly (e.g., 3922 and 3925), and an external cavity housing the display construct (e.g., 3901). The transparent material 3920 of the sensor-emitter assembly caps (at least in part, e.g., with the adhesive material) this internal cavity from external influences (e.g., humidity and/or debris). 3920 a is a portion of transparent material 3920. Position X on which the display construct 3901 is disposed, is vertically and horizontally within the height of the framing h and the width of the framing w. The adhesive material can be a very bonding (VHB) adhesive material (e.g., VHB double side tape of 3M).

In some embodiments, two orthogonal sensor and emitter panels are held together by a corner assembly piece. The corner assembly piece may comprise guiding features configured to guide two orthogonal circuitry of the sensors and emitters and align them (e.g., vertically) with respect to each other, e.g., within a tolerance. The corner piece may have step guides, or wavy guides. FIG. 39 shows an example of a corner assembly 3940 comprising a body 3991 and a corner cover 3995, which corner assembly has two guides 3996 a and 3996 b, each guiding a sensor and emitter circuitry. The guide (e.g., self-guiding feature) may be configured to hold the circuit board in place (e.g., within a tolerance). The tolerance may allow vertical and/or horizontal displacement of the circuit board of at most about 0.5 millimeter (e.g., mm), 0.4 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.2 mm, or 0.1 mm.

In some embodiments, the framing of the display construct is coupled to the fastener using at least one connective piece. The connective piece may comprise a tripod. The connective piece may have three planes facing three orthogonal directions. The connective piece may be configured to connect the fastener with the protective framing of the sensor-emitter panel. The connective piece may be configured to engulf three orthogonal sides of a portion of (e.g., an edge of) the fastener. FIG. 40 shows perspective view examples of various portions of a display construct and associated components. FIG. 40 shows an example of an entire connective piece 4090 having three orthogonal sides 4090 a, 4090 b, and 4090 c (4090 d is a partial view of 4090 a). the connective piece 4090 is configured to connect to the gas direction portion 4032 (shown in a partial view thereof) that directs gas through a first opening 4005, a second opening 4050 and onto the rear side of display construct 4001 (shown as a portion of the display construct), e.g., along broken arrows 4051. The connective piece 4090 is configured to seal a circuitry held by supporting portion 4070, and couple to (e.g., connect to) the supporting portion. and to a side of the protective framing of the sensor-emitter assembly 4003 (partial view shown) at its 4090 a side. The fastener comprises at least one hinge having knuckles and pintle (e.g., 4082), a first hinge leaf 4021 (partial view shown) comprising a bracket that is configured to mount on a supportive structure (e.g., fixture), and a second hinge leaf 4022 (partial view shown). The second hinge leaf having at least one gas opening such as 4005, comprises an elevated structure 4040 that reduces escape of gas between the leaf of the hinge, when the hinge is at its closed position. The fastener 4002 is configured to house at least one circuit board, e.g., 4030 (shown as the entire circuit board). Circuit board 4030 (e.g., comprising the driver and/or booster board) is configured to connect to the display construct 4001 and provide data and/or power via cabling 4031. Circuit board 4030 is also configured to connect the E-box (e.g., comprising the timing controller) and/or to the power supply via (e.g., six) other cables not sown in FIG. 40 . The other cables may extend from the face of board 4030 that is opposite to the one shown in FIG. 40 .

In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to direct a flow of gas. The flow of gas can be directed along designated openings in the fastener and/or formed by the fastener. The fastener, e.g., at its operational and/or closed position, may reduce the probability of gas flow in directions other than the designated openings. The operational position of the fastener can be a position that facilitates operation of the display construct for its intended purpose (e.g., projecting media). The fastener may comprise a hinge having two leaves (e.g., joined by knuckles and pintle arrangement). At least one of the leaves may comprise an elevated rim to reduce gas from in that direction, e.g., when the fastener is closed and/or operational. At least one of the leaves may comprise a gasket to reduce gas from in that direction, e.g., when the fastener is closed and/or operational. FIG. 41 shows perspective and top view examples of display construct 4101 coupled to a portion of a fastener 4122 having a plurality of holes 4105 b and 4105 a configured to facilitate gas flowing therethrough. The hinge leaf 4122 comprises knuckles 4182. The hinge leaf comprises an elevated portions 4160 that reduces flow of gas through the elevated portion, which flow of gas is between the interior of the fastener (e.g., when closed and/or operational) and the ambient environment. The elevated portion may comprise a gasket; or be devoid of a gasket. The hinge leaf 4122 comprises a depression 4104 that extends to a portion of its width and is centered at its length. 4104 a is a portion of 4104. Items 4122 a and 4122 b are portions of 4122. A gasket may be placed along the 4122 rim of the opening 4104, as depicted in broken line 4162. Hinge leaf 4122 comprises a protruding feature (e.g., boss) 4162. The protruding feature may offer structural support to component(s) of the hinge. The protruding feature may be an integral part of the fastener (e.g., of the hinge leaf). The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to the fastener (e.g., of the hinge leaf), e.g., using any of the attachment methods disclosed herein. The protruding feature may be configured to prevent bending (e.g., collapse) of the fastener portion(s) (e.g., hinge leaf). The gasket may be formed of a polymer and/or resin. The polymer and/or resin may comprise a carbon or a silicon based material. For example, the polymer may be a polyurethane polymer. The gasket may comprise a foamy material. The gasket may comprise gas pockets, or may be devoid of (e.g., detectable) gas pockets. The gasket may comprise a flexible material (e.g., rubber or latex). The gasket may comprise a material that is opaque or transparent to visible light.

In some embodiments, the circuitry contacts and/or attached to the gas guide. For example, the circuitry can be disposed and/or attach to the gas guide, e.g., above the gas guide. Above may be in a direction opposite to a gravitational center (e.g., opposite to the direction of the gravitational vector 4200 that points to the gravitational center). The circuitry may be configured to facilitate gas flow through the gas channels. FIG. 42 shows various portions of the display construct and associated fastener assembly as perspective views. FIG. 42 shows an example of a circuit board 4230 (e.g., comprising the driver and/or booster board) that is configured to connect to the display construct (shown as portion 4201) and provide data and/or power via cabling 4231. Circuit board 4230 (partial view shown) is also configured to connect the E-box (e.g., comprising the timing controller) and/or to the power supply via (e.g., six) other cables not sown in FIG. 42 . The other cables may extend from the face of board 4230 that is opposite to the one shown in FIG. 42 . FIG. 42 shows an example of integration of the circuit board 4230 into the fastener that comprises a first portion 4222 (partially shown) and a second portion 4221 (partial view shown) held by hinges 4285. Hinge leaf 4222 is coupled to a gas guide 4223 that is configured to guide gas flowing through (e.g., incoming or outgoing) the openings (not shown in FIG. 42 ). The gas guide is coupled to a plate 4255 (partial view shown) having ten protrusions. The protrusions can be evenly spaced along the length of the plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide 4223 to form a gas passage (e.g., between every two protrusions). The protrusions are configured to prevent bending (e.g., collapse) of the gas guide and/or the plate. The protrusions are configured to ensure that the gas passages remain operational and/or intact over time. The gas guide 4223 and the plate 4255 guide the gas in the direction depicted by the broken arrows (e.g., 4251). The hinge leaf 4222 is configured to engage with hinge leaf 4221 comprising a bracket. The display construct 4201 (partial view shown) is framed by sensor-emitter panels (e.g., 4203, partial view shown) that facilitate touch screen capability. 4299 shows a portion view of the fastener, display construct, and associated components. At least one gas passages may be aligned with a fan. The gas passage may be configured to facilitate a flow of gas that is at least as the flow of gas generated by the fan e.g., that is aligned to the gas passage). The gas passage may be configured to prevent a pressure in the fasteners that differs from ambient pressure, e.g., during operation of the fan(s). The ambient pressure may be of about 1 atmosphere. A pressure differing from ambient pressure comprises over or under pressure.

In some embodiments, the two portions of the fastener (e.g., first and second hinge leaves) are configured to reversibly engage and disengage from each other. For example, one hinge leaf may comprise knuckles having a closed cavity that hold a pintle, and the other leaf may comprise complementary knuckles having open cavity and are devoid of a pintle. The two complementary sets of knuckles may engage. The engagement may comprise a snap (e.g., slip in and snap via a snap fit). The engagement may press a spring. The engagement may be detected by a compression of a spring and/or by a sensor (e.g., pressure sensor). Once the complementary sets of knuckles are engaged, they may be affixed to prevent disengagement. The Affixing may be by utilizing a screw and/or a pin. Affixing may be automatically initiated on engagement of the two sets of complementary knuckles (e.g., using the sensor and/or spring). The Affixing may be manual. Affixing the two hinge leaves (e.g., by affixing the knuckles) may be reversible (e.g., automatic and/or manual). The knuckles may comprise an indentation on their surface (e.g., a notch or an incision). The screw and/or pin may engage with the indentation, e.g., upon affixing (e.g., securing) the knuckles and pintle mechanism. Affixing the knuckles and pintle may prevent the hinge to open. At least one of the hinges may comprise the fixating (e.g., affixing) mechanism. Fixating may be (e.g., automatically and/or manually) reversible (e.g., become unfixed). The unfixed hinge can open and close. The fixed hinge may remain in one position (e.g., closed position). Automatic fixation of the hinge may be controller by a controller (e.g., of the control system, or by a separate controller operatively coupled to the hinge).

FIG. 43 shows an example of a hinge leaf 4321 having two sets of open cavity knuckles 4385 a and 4385 b. Pintle 4320 a is shown as engaged with knuckle set 4385 a, which pintle simulates the complementary set of closed cavity knuckles and pintle assembly (e.g., 4082) of the complementary hinge leaf (e.g., 4022 shows a portion of a hinge leaf). Screw 4389 is engaged with knuckles 4385 a. FIG. 43 shows a protrusion 4388 representing a snap spring. Screw 4389 can be engaged or disengaged with the knuckle in the direction 4387. Pintle 4320 b (partial view shown) can engage or disengage from knuckle 4385 c (partial view shown) by moving in direction 4386. 4300 shows a portion view of hinge leaf 4321, knuckle set 4851 a, and screw 4389. Fastener portion 4321 is shown as perspective view in 4370.

In some embodiments, a user controls a set of displays via a touch screen as if the set of displays was a single display (e.g., screen division of an image). The screen division of the displayed image among the display set may be effectuated via software (e.g., non-transitory computer readable medium). The software may read inputs (e.g., via the network and/or USB) from each touch display and, knowing where each display is located in the set (also called group), may compute the location of the user touch in the set. For example, assuming the set has a Cartesian coordinate system where 0, 0 is located at a lower left corner (as viewed by a viewer of the displays) and 100%, 100% is located at the upper right corner (as viewed from a viewer of the displays), for a 2×2 display group the lower left corner of a display set is 0, 0 and the upper right corner of the display set is 100%, 100%. For this example of a 2×2 display set, the transformation of the touch on any display is represented by: X=(0.5*(X of one of the left side displays) or (0.5+(0.5*(X of one of the right side displays))); and Y=(0.5*(Y of one of the lower displays) or (0.5+(0.5*(Y of one of the upper displays))); where X is in a horizontal direction relative to a display viewer and Y is in a vertical direction relative to a display viewer. Adjustments may be made to the transformation of the coordinate system to account for screen gap between the touch displays. Each of the four displays may include its own two sets of sensor and emitter panel (e.g., around the edge of each display) to detect user touch for touch screen functionality. Each of the displays may have only two of the four sensor and emitter panels attached, which panels may be attached around the outer edges of the display set.

FIG. 30A shows an example of four displays 3002 a, 3002 b, 3002 c and 3002 d that form a display set 3003. Each of the displays 3002 a-d displays the same image. FIG. 30A shows an example of four displays 3022 a, 3022 b, 3022 c and 3022 d that form a display set 3023. Each of the displays 3022 a-d displays together the image displayed in, e.g., 3002 c. If a user will want to click on the surfer displayed in the display set 3003, the user will be able to do so by clicking on any position 3008 a-d of display set 3003. If a user will want to click on the surfer displayed in the display set 3023, the user will be able to do so by clicking on position 3029 of display set 3023, but not on, e.g., position 3028 (that is analogous to position 3008 c). The screen division of the image among the display set 3023 may be effectuated via software. The software may read inputs (e.g., from the touch screen or curser) and, knowing how the image is parceled among the displays, compute a location that the user points to. For example, assuming the set has a Cartesian coordinate system where 0, 0 is located at a lower left corner (as viewed by a viewer of the displays) and 100%, 100% is located at the upper right corner (as viewed from a viewer of the displays), for a 2×2 display group the lower left corner of display 3002 c is 0, 0 and the upper right corner of display 3002 b is 100%, 100%. For this example of a 2×2 display set, the transformation of the touch on any display is represented by: X=(0.5*(X of display 3002 a or 3002 c) or (0.5+(0.5*(X of display 3002 b or 3002 d))); and Y=(0.5*(Y of display 3002 c or 3002 d) or (0.5+(0.5*(Y of display 3002 a or 3002 b))); where X is in a horizontal direction relative to a display viewer and Y is in a vertical direction relative to a display viewer. Adjustments may be made to the transformation of the coordinate system to account for screen gap 3005 between the touch displays. FIG. 30A shows an example of gaps 3005 and 3025 between two immediately adjacent displays, which gaps may be filled with a polymer and/or resin.

FIG. 30B shows an example of four displays 3010 a, 3010 b, 3010 c and 3010 d (shown by the left four displays shown in FIG. 30B) in a display set 3011, wherein the image is displayed across the four displays 3010 a-3010 d as if they were as singled display (shown by the right four displays shown in FIG. 30B). Each of the displays can have its own identification (e.g., shown as numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4).

FIG. 31A shows an example of four display constructs 3101 a, 3101 b, 3101 c and 3101 d in a 2×2 display construct set 3103. Each of the four displays 3101 a-3101 d includes its own two sets of sensor and emitter panel 3104 (shown around the edge of each display) to detect user contact for touch screen functionality.

FIG. 31B sows an example of four display constructs 3105 a, 3105 b, 3105 c and 3105 d in a 2×2 display construct set 3106 that engulf the display construct set. The set of display constructs 3106 collectively has two perpendicular sensor and emitter panels attached in frame 3108, which panels are attached around the outer edges of the display set 3106. Thus, each of the display constructs 3105 a-d has two sides on which a sensor emitter panel portion is disposed (e.g., the external matrix sides), and two sides devoid of a sensor and emitter panel (e.g., the internal matrix sides).

In some embodiments, media displays forming a matrix of displays may be mounted adjacent to a supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window. The window may be any window disclosed herein. For example, the supportive panel may be a tintable window. The supportive panel may include framing. The framing may surround a portion or all of the supportive panel. The framing may include one or more transoms and/or one or more mullions. The media displays may be immediately adjacent to each other When a first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to a second media display, there are no other (intervening) media displays disposed between the first media display and the second media display. The matrix of displays adjacent to a supportive panel may be a 1×2, 1×3, 1×4 or any 1×n matrix (with “n” being an integer). The matrix of displays adjacent to a supportive panel may be a 2×2, 2×3, 2×4, or any 2×n matrix (with “n” being an integer). The matrix of displays adjacent to a supportive panel may be a m×n matrix, with m and n being integers that may or may not be equal to each other. When m is greater than 2, then the display matrix may be divided into portions of 2×n and 1×n matrices, e.g., in terms of the retaining clip configurations. The media displays may be displaceable (e.g., movable) relative to the supportive panel. For example, the media displays may swivel (e.g., pivot) relative to the support panel. The media displays may swivel about hinge joint(s). A hinge joint may be defined by a respective hinge pivotally securing a media display to a support panel. Each of the hinges may be secured between framing of the supportive panel and a framing of respective media display. The hinges may be disposed at a top, bottom and/or sides of the media displays. Top and bottom may be relative to a gravitational center. Hinges for greater than 1×2 (e.g., 1×n, with n>2) display matrices and 2×4 (e.g., 2×n, with n>4) display matrices may be located along edges of the media displays in the smaller matrix dimension. The media displays may be swivelable into a position where the media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane.

In some embodiments, a semi-permeable material is disposed between framing of the supportive panel and one or more adjacent media panels. The semi-permeable material may be secured to the framing of the supportive panel (e.g., an adhesive between the semi-permeable material and the framing). The semi-permeable material may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the framing of the supportive panel and one or more of the media displays (e.g., along edges of one or more of the media displays), e.g., to eliminate any cracks through which light can penetrate through between the framing and the display. The semi-permeable material may allow for circulation of air through the semi-permeable material (e.g., to facilitate cooling of the display construct). The semi-permeable material may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane) configured to insulate light (e.g., reduce or block light penetration between the framing of the supportive panel and one or more media displays), facilitate air flow (e.g., for cooling the one or more media displays) along the displays, and/or provide a cushion to reduce (e.g., eliminate) damage during installation and/or operation of the media displays (e.g., reduce damage due to banging one or more of the media displays with the framing). The material of the semi-permeable material may comprise a polymer (e.g., an organic polymer, or a silicon based polymer). The semi-permeable material may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 50%), which may set a planar alignment of the media displays in the matrix of displays.

In some embodiment, mounting the display construct (e.g., media display) to the framing comprises engaging a retaining clip. A retaining clip may be removably mountable to the media displays. The retaining clip may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The semi-permeable material may be compressed during installation of the retaining clip. The retaining clip, in conjunction with the semi-permeable material, may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane (e.g., viewable plane of the media display). The semi-permeable material, which may be compressed during installation of the retaining clip, may generate a reaction force on the media displays opposite from a force applied to the media displays due to the retaining clip, with such reaction force facilitating maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The retaining clip may retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays opposite from ends of the media displays that are coupled to hinges. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to an end of a first media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to an end of a second media display. For a display matrix greater than 1×2 (e.g., 1×n, n>2) or 2×4 (e.g., 2×n, n>4), more than one retaining clip may be employed to secure media displays relative to the supportive panel, and maintain a planar (or substantially planar) plane of the displays in the matrix (e.g., which plane may be the viewable plane of the media displays forming the display matrix).

FIG. 44 shows an example of an assembly 4400 having four media displays 4405 a-4405 d forming a matrix of displays. While shown as a 2×4 display matrix, such a matrix may be 2×n (“n” being an integer), with retaining clips, discussed below, between immediately adjacent media displays. The media displays 4405 a-4405 d are adjacent to a supportive panel (e.g., window; e.g., any window disclosed herein) 4410 that includes framing. The framing may include mullions 4415 a and 4415 b and transoms 4420 a and 4420 b. The media displays 4405 a-4405 b may be disposed within the framing. Media displays 4405 a and 4405 b may be disposed on substantially the same vertical plane immediately adjacent to each other, and media displays 4405 c and 4405 d may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same vertical plane immediately adjacent to each other. Media displays 4405 a and 4405 c may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same horizontal plane immediately adjacent to each other, and media displays 4405 b and 4405 d may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same horizontal plane immediately adjacent to each other. Horizontal and vertical may be relative to a gravitational center (e.g., in the direction of gravitational vector 4490 directed to gravitational center G). Media display 4405 a may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425 a, media display 4405 b may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425 b, media display 4405 c may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425 c, and media display 4405 d may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425 d. Each media display 4405 a-4405 d may be pivotable about joints formed by the hinges 4425 a-4425 d, respectively, to positions where the media displays 4405 a-4405 d extend away from the supportive panel 4410 and positions where the media displays 4405 a-4405 d extend generally parallel to the supportive panel 4410 such that the media displays 4405 a-4405 d are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane (e.g., media viewing plane). A retaining clip 4430 may be removably mounted to the media displays 4405 a-4405 d such that the retaining clip 4430 facilitates maintaining alignment of the media displays 4405 a-4405 d in the same, or substantially the same, planes, and/or retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the media displays 4405 a-4405 d during engagement of the retaining clip 4430 with the media displays 4405 a-4405 d. The retaining clip 4430 may be disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays 4405 a-4405 d opposite from ends of the media displays 4405 a-4405 d that are coupled to the hinges 4425 a-4425 d. Removably mounted comprises removal and mounting reversibly.

FIG. 44 shows an example of an assembly 4450 having two media displays 4455 a-445 b forming a matrix of displays. The media displays 4455 a-4455 b are disposed adjacent to a supportive panel (e.g., window; e.g., any window disclosed herein) 4460 that includes framing. The framing may include mullions 4465 a and 4465 b and transoms 4470 a and 4470 b. The media displays 4455 a-4455 d may be disposed within the framing. Media displays 4455 a and 4455 b may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same vertical plane immediately adjacent to each other. Media display 4455 a may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4460 via a hinge 4475 a, and media display 4455 b may be pivotally coupled to the supportive panel 4460 via a hinge 4475 b. Each media display 4455 a-4455 b may be pivotable about joints formed by the hinges 4475 a-4475 b, respectively, to positions where the media displays 4455 a-4455 b extend away from the supportive panel 4460 and positions where the media displays 4455 a-4455 b extend generally parallel to the supportive panel 4460 such that the media displays 4455 a-4455 b are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane (e.g., media viewing plane). A retaining clip 4480 may be removably mounted to the media displays 4455 a-4455 b such that the retaining clip 4480 facilitates maintaining alignment of the media displays 4455 a-4455 b in the same, or substantially the same, planes, and/or retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the media displays 4455 a-4455 b during engagement of the retaining clip 4480 with the media displays 4455 a-4455 b. The retaining clip 4480 may be disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays 4455 a-4455 b opposite from ends of the media displays 4455 a-4455 b that are coupled to the hinges 4475 a-4475 b.

In some embodiments, interior framing portions are configured to be secured to a supportive panel (e.g., 4410, 4460) and be removably coupled to a retaining clip (e.g., 4430, 4380). Interior framing portions may comprise one or more framing members. Interior framing portions may be configured to extend across a supportive panel and/or along an edge of a supportive panel. Interior framing portions may include a first arm extending between or along framing of the supportive panel. A first arm may be mounted to a supportive panel (e.g., with fasteners and/or by welding). Interior framing portions may include a second arm, which may be generally normal to a first arm. The second arm may extend between or along framing of the supportive panel. A second arm may be mounted to a supportive panel (e.g., with fasteners and/or welding). The first arm may have upstanding flanges. The upstanding flanges may provide stiffness against out of plane bending. The first arm may have upstanding flanges such that the first arm has a generally C-shaped cross section. The first arm may have upstanding flanges such that the first arm has a generally L-shaped cross section. The second arm may have upstanding flanges. The upstanding flanges may provide stiffness against out of plane bending. The second arm may have upstanding flanges such that the second arm has a generally C-shaped cross section. The second arm may have upstanding flanges such that the second arm has a generally L-shaped cross section. The first arm may be secured directly to the second arm. The first arm secured to the second arm may form a joint. The first arm may be directly secured to the second arm such that tolerances in separate parts are accommodated. One or both of the first and second arms may include slotted fastener holes, allowing for accommodation of tolerances. One or both of the first and second arms may include cutouts, allowing for accommodation of tolerances. The first arm may be secured to the second arm via a joint bracket. A joint bracket may be X-shaped, +-shaped, and/or cross-shaped. The first arm secured to the second arm may form a joint. The first arm may be secured to the second arm via a joint bracket such that tolerances in separate parts are accommodated. One or both of the first and second arms may include slotted fastener holes, allowing for accommodation of tolerances. One or both of the first and second arms may include cutouts, allowing for accommodation of tolerances. The tolerances accommodated may account for fabrication and/or assembly tolerances in framing (e.g., transoms and/or mullions), interior framing portions and/or brackets. The interior framing portions may include a member for releasably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portions. The member for releasably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portions may be a boss. The boss may have a threaded hole. The retaining clip may have a passage alignable with the threaded hole. A fastener may be configured to telescopically slide through the passage and be threadably received in the threaded hole of the boss. The interior framing portions may include one or more stiffener flanges. The one or more stiffener flanges may be located adjacent to where a retaining clip is secured to the interior framing portions. The one or more stiffener flanges may be secured to the boss. The one or more stiffener flanges may provide stiffness against out of plane bending.

A semi-permeable material may be disposed between interior framing portions and one or more adjacent media panels. The semi-permeable material may be secured to the interior framing portions (e.g., an adhesive between the semi-permeable material and the interior framing portions). The semi-permeable material may be mounted along a plate, between upstanding flanges, of a generally C-shaped arm. The semi permeable material may be compressible. The semi permeable material may comprise a memory foam. The semi permeable material may comprise one or more holes and/or channels (e.g., configured to allow gas to flow there thorough). The semi-permeable material, in an uncompressed state, may have a thickness greater than a height of the upstanding flanges (e.g., media panels may contact the semi-permeable material with reduced or no contact with a generally C-shaped, or U shaped arm (e.g., 5362). The generally C-shaped arm may comprise at least two (e.g., linear) parallel sections, and one (e.g., linear) perpendicular section to the two parallel sections. A first linear section may be adjoined by a second linear section perpendicular to the first linear section, by a curved section of the arm. The arm may comprise a curved section (e.g., adjoining two immediately adjacent linear sections). The arm may comprise a non-curved section (e.g., linear section). The semi-permeable material may be mounted along a plate, adjacent to a flange, of a generally L-shaped arm (e.g., J-shaped) arm such as 5023. The generally L-shaped arm may comprise a first (e.g., linear) section perpendicular to a second (e.g., linear) section. The first and second sections may be adjoined by a curved section. The semi-permeable material, in an uncompressed state, may have a thickness sufficient to have reduced or no contact with the L-shaped arm. The semi-permeable material may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the interior framing portions and one or more of the media displays (e.g., along edges of one or more of the media displays). The semi-permeable material may allow for circulation of air through the semi-permeable material (e.g., for cooling of the display matrix). The semi-permeable material may comprise a foam (e.g., polyurethane) configured to insulate light (e.g., reduce or block light penetration between the interior framing portions and one or more media displays), facilitate air flow (e.g., for cooling the one or more media displays) along the displays, and/or provide a cushion to reduce (e.g., eliminate) damage during installation and/or operation of the media displays (e.g., reduce damage due to banging one or more of the media displays with the interior framing portions). The semi-permeable material may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 50%), which may set, or facilitate, a planar alignment of the media displays in the matrix of displays.

In some embodiments, the interior framing portions may be configured to couple to a retaining clip disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays. The ends of the media displays that may be coupled to the retaining clip, may each be opposite from a side of a respective one of the media displays that is coupled to a supportive panel. The retaining clip may be configured to be coupled to pins, with each pin secured to a respective end of one of the media displays. The pins engageable by the retaining clip that are on immediately adjacent media displays (with no media displays disposed therebetween) may be adjacent to each other. A pin may have a shank portion secured to and/or within a respective media display and a head portion configured to extend from the respective media display and be engageable with a retaining clip.

In some embodiments, the retaining clip may have a shape configured for releasably securing to interior framing portions. The retaining clip may have a shape configured for releasably securing to media displays. The retaining clip may be generally T-shaped. The generally T-shaped retaining may comprise two (e.g., linear) sections (e.g., 4560) intercepted by one (e.g., linear) perpendicular section (e.g., 4555) to the two sections. The two sections may have the same shape and/or size. The two sections may be disposed on the same line. A generally T-shaped retaining clip may include a main leg configured to be secured to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing, and extend outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and a T-leg extending generally normal to the main leg and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays. The main leg may include a passage therethrough configured to receive a fastener (e.g., screw, or nail) that releasably secures the retaining clip to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The fastener may be configured to extend through the passage in the main leg and be threadably secured in a boss of the interior framing portions. The T-leg may couple to ends of adjacent media displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The T-leg may be configured to couple to adjacent pins, each secured to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-leg may include pin retention flanges that partially encircle the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip. Semi-permeable material coupled to the interior framing portions may be compressed during installation of the T-shaped retaining clip. The retaining clip, in conjunction with the semi-permeable material, may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The semi-permeable material, which may be compressed during installation of the retaining clip, may generate a reaction force on the media displays opposite from a force applied to the media displays due to the retaining clip, with such reaction force facilitating maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The retaining clip may be generally L-shaped. A generally L-shaped retaining clip may include a main leg configured to be secured to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing, and extend outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg extending generally normal to the main leg and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays. The main leg of an L-shaped retaining clip may include a passage therethrough configured to receive a fastener that releasably secures the retaining clip to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The fastener may be configured to extend through the passage in the main leg and be threadably secured in a boss of the interior framing portions. The L-leg may couple to ends of adjacent media displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The L-leg may be configured to couple to adjacent pins, each secured to a respective one of up to two adjacent media displays. The L-leg may include a pin retention flange that partially encircles the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip. Semi-permeable material coupled to the interior framing portions may be compressed during installation of the L-shaped retaining clip. The retaining clip, in conjunction with the semi-permeable material, may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The semi-permeable material, which may be compressed during installation of the retaining clip, may generate a reaction force on the media displays opposite from a force applied to the media displays due to the retaining clip, with such reaction force facilitating maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane.

FIG. 45 shows an example of some of the interior framing portions 4500 that are configured to couple with a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4410 ) and a retaining clip (e.g., FIG. 44, 4430 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 4510 may comprise a first arm 4510 that is secured to a joint bracket 4515. The first arm 4510 may comprise a plate 4520 with upstanding flanges 4525 a-4525 b extending along either side. The plate 4520 may block light from shining through in gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44 , between 4405 a and 4405 c, and between 4405 b and 4405 d). The upstanding flanges 4525 a and 4525 b may increase the out-of-plane stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the first arm 4510. The upstanding flanges 4525 a and 4525 b may have a height out-of-plane that is sized to facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d) in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4515 may comprise fastener holes 4530 for securing to a second arm (e.g., FIG. 46, 4612 ) to the joint bracket 4515. The joint bracket 4515 comprises a stiffening flange 4535 extending parallel to the upstanding flanges 4525 a and 4525 b, with the stiffening flange 4535 extending along a portion of the plate 4520 and over the joint bracket 4515 to a boss 4540 of the joint bracket 4515, enhancing out-of-plane stiffness of the interior framing portions 4500. The boss 4540 has a threaded bore 4545, which is configured to receive a fastener extending from a retaining clip 4550.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a retaining clip 4550, which may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to four media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d). The retaining clip 4550 is generally T-shaped. The generally T-shaped retaining clip 4550 may include a main leg 4555 that is secured to the supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4410 ) and/or the interior framing portion 4500, and extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and a T-leg 4560 extending generally normal to the main leg 4555 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d). The main leg 4555 may include a passage 4565 therethrough configured to receive a fastener (e.g., FIG. 46, 4626 ) that releasably secures the retaining clip 4550 to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The fastener is configured to extend through the passage 4565 in the main leg 4555 and be threadably secured in a boss 4540 of the interior framing portions 4500. The T-leg 4560 couples to ends of adjacent media displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The T-leg 4560 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins (e.g., FIG. 47, 4700 ), each secured to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-leg 4560 includes pin retention flanges 4570 that partially encircle the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip 4550.

FIG. 46 shows an example of an assembly 4600 comprising the interior framing portions 4602 and a retaining clip 4604 that are configured to couple with a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4410 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 4602 may comprise a first arm 4605 that is secured to a joint bracket 4606. The first arm 4605 may comprise a plate 4608 with upstanding flanges 4610 a-4610 b extending along either side. The plate 4608 may block light from shining through in gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44 , between 4405 a and 4405 c, and between 4405 b and 4405 d). The upstanding flanges 4610 a and 4610 b may increase the out-of-plane stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the first arm 4605. The upstanding flanges 4610 a and 4610 b may have a height out-of-plane that is sized to facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d) in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4606 may comprise fastener holes (e.g., FIG. 45, 4530 ) for securing to a second arm 4612 with fasteners 4614 via slotted holes 4616. The slotted holes 4616 may allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4600 and support panel. The second arm 4612 may comprise a plate 4618 with upstanding flanges 4620 a-4620 b extending along either side. The plate 4618 may block light from shining through in gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44 , between 4405 a and 4405 b, and between 4405 c and 4405 d). The plate 4618 may have cutouts 4621 adjacent to an end in order to allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4600 and support panel. The upstanding flanges 4620 a and 4620 b may increase the out-of-plane stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the second arm 4612. The upstanding flanges 4620 a and 4620 b may have a height out-of-plane that is sized to facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d) in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4606 comprises a stiffening flange 4622 extending parallel to the upstanding flanges 4610 a and 4610 b, with the stiffening flange 4622 extending along a portion of the plate 4608 and over the joint bracket 4606 to a boss 4624 of the joint bracket 4606, enhancing out-of-plane stiffness of the interior framing portions 4602. The boss 4624 has a threaded bore (e.g., FIG. 45, 4545 ), which is configured to receive a fastener 4626 extending through the retaining clip 4604. The retaining clip 4604 may be shaped as described in the example of FIG. 45 .

FIG. 47 shows an example of a pin 4700. The pin 4700 may include a shank portion 4702 that is configured to secure to a media display (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d) and a head portion 4704 configured to extend from a media display and engage with a retaining clip (e.g., FIG. 46, 4604 ).

FIG. 47 shows an example of a media display 4750 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 a-4405 d) having a pin 4752 attached thereto. The media display has an end 4754 (which may be part of a media display framing 4756) to which the pin 4752 is attached. The end 4754 is on an opposite side of the media display 4750 from the corresponding hinge (e.g., FIG. 44, 4425 a-4425 d).

FIG. 48 shows an example of an assembly 4800 comprising the interior framing portions 4802, a retaining clip 4804 and one of four media displays 4806 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4405 c) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4410 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 4802 may comprise a first arm 4805 and a second arm 4812 that are secured to a joint bracket 4806. The joint bracket 4806 may comprise fastener holes (e.g., FIG. 45, 4530 ) for securing to the second arm 4812 with fasteners 4814 via slotted holes 4816. The slotted holes 4816 may allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4800 and support panel. The second arm 4812 may have cutouts 4821 a and 4821 b adjacent to an end in order to allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4800 and support panel. The joint bracket 4806 comprises a stiffening flange 4822 extending to a boss 4824 of the joint bracket 4806, enhancing out-of-plane stiffness of the interior framing portions 4802. The boss 4824 has a threaded bore (e.g., FIG. 45, 4545 ), which is configured to receive a fastener 4826 extending through a main leg 4830 of the retaining clip 4804 to secure the retaining clip 4804 to the boss 4824. The retaining clip 4804 may be shaped as described in the example of FIG. 45 . A T-leg 4832 couples to ends of adjacent media displays (one media display 4806 shown) to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The T-leg 4832 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins 4836 (one pin shown), each secured adjacent to an end 4846 to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-leg 4832 includes pin retention flanges 4840 that partially encircle the pins (one shown) to retain the pins 4836 against the retaining clip 4804, thus retaining the media displays against the interior framing portions 4802.

FIG. 48 shows an example of an assembly 4850 comprising the interior framing portions 4852, a retaining clip 4854 and three of four media displays 4856 (e.g., FIGS. 44, 4405 a, 4405 c and 4405 d) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4410 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in FIG. 44 . The retaining clip 4854 may be shaped as described in the example of FIG. 45 . A T-leg 4882 couples to ends of adjacent media displays (three media displays 4806 shown) to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The T-leg 4882 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins 4886 (coupled to three pins—one pin 4886 shown), each secured adjacent to an end 4896 to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-leg 4882 includes pin retention flanges 4890 that partially encircle the pins (one shown) to retain the pins 4886 against the retaining clip 4854, thus retaining the media displays against the interior framing portions 4852.

FIG. 49 shows an example of a portion of interior framing 4900 comprising a first arm 4902 configured to mount to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4480 in FIG. 44 . The first arm 4902 may be L-shaped, with a plate 4904 and a flange 4906. The plate 4904 may comprise fastener holes 4908 for securing a second arm (e.g., FIG. 50, 5012 ) to the first arm 4902. The plate 4904 may comprise a boss 4910, which includes a threaded hole 4912 configured to receive a fastener (e.g., FIG. 50, 5027 ) extending from a retaining clip (e.g., FIG. 50, 5029 ).

FIG. 49 shows an example of a portion of interior framing 4950 comprising a first arm 4952 configured to mount to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4480 in FIG. 44 . The first arm 4952 may be L-shaped, with a plate 4954 and a flange 4956. The plate 4954 may comprise fastener holes 4958 for securing a second arm (e.g., FIG. 50, 5012 ) to the first arm 4952. The plate 4954 may comprise a boss 4960, which includes a threaded hole 4962 configured to receive a fastener (e.g., FIG. 50, 5027 ) extending from a retaining clip (e.g., FIG. 50, 5029 ).

FIG. 50 shows an example of an assembly 5000 comprising the interior framing portions 5002, a retaining clip 5004 and one of two media displays 5006 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4490 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 5002 may comprise a first arm 5005 and a second arm 5012 that are secured together. The first arm 5005 may comprise fastener holes 5013 for securing to the second arm 5012 with fasteners (e.g., FIG. 48, 4814 ) via slotted holes 5016. The slotted holes 5016 may allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 5000 and support panel. The second arm 5012 may have one or more cutouts 5021 adjacent to an end in order to allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 5000 and support panel. The first arm 5005 may comprise a boss 5010, which includes a threaded hole (e.g., FIG. 49, 4962 ) configured to receive a fastener 5027 extending through a main leg 5017 of retaining clip 5004 to secure the retaining clip 5004 to the boss 5010. The retaining clip 5004 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to two media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). The retaining clip 5004 is generally L-shaped. The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5005 may include a main leg 5017 that is secured to the supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ) and/or the interior framing portion 5002, and extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg 5023 extending generally normal to the main leg 5017 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). The main leg 5017 may include a passage therethrough configured to receive a fastener 5027 that releasably secures the retaining clip 5004 to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The L-leg 5023 couples to ends 5037 of adjacent media displays 5006 (one media display shown in FIG. 50 ) to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The L-leg 5023 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins 5039 (one pin shown in FIG. 50 ), each secured to a respective one of up to two adjacent media displays. The L-leg 5023 includes a pin retention flange 5041 that partially encircles the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip 5004, thus retaining the media displays against the interior framing portions 5002.

FIG. 53A shows an example of an assembly 5300 comprising the interior framing portions 5302, a retaining clip 5304 and one of two media displays 5306 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4490 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 5302 may comprise a first arm 5305 and a second arm 5312 that are secured together. The retaining clip 5304 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to two media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). The retaining clip 5304 is generally L-shaped. The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5305 may include a main leg 5317 that is secured to the supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ) and/or the interior framing portion 5302, and extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg 5323 extending generally normal to the main leg 5317 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). A first gap 5333 may be formed between a plate 5334 of a first arm 5305 of the interior framing portions 5302 and the media displays 5306 when the media displays 5306 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5335 may be formed between upstanding flanges 5336 of the second arm 5312 and the media displays 5306 when the media displays 5306 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material (e.g., as shown and discussed relative to FIGS. 53B and 54A) may be located in the first gap 5333 and/or the second gap 5335. The L-leg 5323 couples to ends 5337 of adjacent media displays 5306 (one media display shown in FIG. 53A) to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The L-leg 5323 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins 5339 (one pin shown in FIG. 53A), each secured to a respective one of up to two adjacent media displays.

FIG. 53B shows an example of an assembly 5350 comprising the interior framing portions 5352, a retaining clip 5354 and one of two media displays 5356 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4490 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 5352 may comprise a first arm 5355 and a second arm 5362 that are secured together. The retaining clip 5354 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to two media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). The retaining clip 5354 is generally L-shaped. The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5354 may include a main leg 5367 that is secured to the supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ) and/or the interior framing portion 5362, and extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg 5373 extending generally normal to the main leg 5367 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). A first gap 5383 may be formed between a plate 5384 of a first arm 5355 of the interior framing portions 5352 and the media displays 5356 when the media displays 5356 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5385 may be formed between upstanding flanges 5386 of the second arm 5362 and the media displays 5356 when the media displays 5356 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material (e.g., as shown and discussed relative to FIG. 54A) may be located in the first gap 5383 and/or a semi-permeable material 5398 may be disposed in the second gap 5385. The semi-permeable material 5398 in the second gap 5385 may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane). The semi-permeable material 5398 may be secured (e.g., with an adhesive) to the second arm 5362. The semi-permeable material 5398 may be mounted along a plate 5397, between upstanding flanges 5386, of a generally C-shaped arm 5362). The semi-permeable material 5398, in an uncompressed state, may have a thickness greater than a height of the upstanding flanges 5386 (e.g., media displays 5356 may contact the semi-permeable material 5398 with reduced or no contact with the C-shaped arm 5362. The semi-permeable material 5398 may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the second arm 5362 and the adjacent media displays 5356. The semi-permeable material 5398 may allow for circulation of air through the semi-permeable material 5398 (e.g., cool the media displays 5356). The semi-permeable material 5398 may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., about 20% to about 25%, inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a planar alignment of the media displays 5356 to facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays 5356 in the same, or substantially the same, plane.

FIG. 54A shows an example of an assembly 5400 comprising the interior framing portions 5402, a retaining clip 5404 and one of two media displays 5406 (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4490 in FIG. 44 . The interior framing portions 5402 may comprise a first arm 5405 and a second arm 5412 that are secured together. The retaining clip 5404 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to two media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). The retaining clip 5404 is generally L-shaped. The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5404 may include a main leg 5417 that is secured to the supportive panel (e.g., FIG. 44, 4460 ) and/or the interior framing portion 5412, and extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg 5423 extending generally normal to the main leg 5417 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays (e.g., FIG. 44, 4455 a-4455 b). A first gap 5433 may be formed between a plate 5334 of a first arm 5405 of the interior framing portions 5402 and the media displays 5406 when the media displays 5406 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5435 may be formed between upstanding flanges 5436 of the second arm 5412 and the media displays 5406 when the media displays 5406 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material 5448 may be located in the first gap 5433 and/or a semi-permeable material (e.g., 5398, as shown and discussed relative to FIG. 53B) may be disposed in the second gap 5435. The semi-permeable material 5448 in the first gap 5433 may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane). The semi-permeable material 5448 may be secured (e.g., with an adhesive) to the first arm 5405. The semi-permeable material 5448 may be mounted along a plate of a generally L-shaped arm 5405. The semi-permeable material 5448 may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the first arm 5405 and the adjacent media displays 5406. The semi-permeable material 5448 may allow for circulation of air through the semi-permeable material 5448 (e.g., cool the media displays 5406). The semi-permeable material 5448 may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., about 20% to about 25%, inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a planar alignment of the media displays 5406 to facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays 5406 in the same, or substantially the same, plane.

FIG. 54B shows an example of an assembly 5450 comprising framing 5452 (e.g., a transom or a mullion) of a supportive panel (e.g., a window) and a media display 5456. A semi-permeable material 5460 is disposed in a gap between the framing 5452 and the media display 5456. The semi-permeable material 5460 in the gap may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane). The semi-permeable material 5460 may be secured (e.g., with an adhesive) to the framing 5254. The semi-permeable material 5460 may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the framing 5254 and the adjacent media display 5456. The semi-permeable material 5460 may allow for circulation of air through the semi-permeable material 5460 (e.g., cool the media display 5456). The semi-permeable material 5460 may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., about 20% to about 25%, inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a planar alignment of the media display 5456 with other media displays in a display matrix to facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane.

In some embodiments, media displays forming a matrix of displays may be mounted adjacent to a supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window. The window may be any window disclosed herein. The supportive panel may be a tintable window. The supportive panel may include framing. The framing may surround a portion or all of the supportive panel. The media displays may be immediately adjacent to each other. The media displays may be displaceable (e.g., movable) relative to the support panel. The media displays may swivel (e.g., pivot) relative to the support panel. Each of the hinges may be secured between framing of the supportive panel and a framing of respective media display. The media displays may be swivelable into a position where the media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane. A retaining clip may be removably mountable to the media displays. The retaining clip may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The retaining clip may retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays opposite from ends of the media displays that are coupled to hinges. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to an end of a first media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to an end of a second media display. Interior framing portions may be configured to be secured to a supportive panel and be removably coupled to a retaining clip. Interior framing portions may comprise one or more framing members. Interior framing portions may be configured to extend across a supportive panel and/or along an edge of a supportive panel. Interior framing portions may include a first arm extending between or along framing of the supportive panel. Interior framing portions may include a second arm, which may be generally normal to a first arm. The second arm may extend between or along framing of the supportive panel. The interior framing portions may include a member for releasably securing a retaining clip to the interior framing portions.

In some embodiments, a framing system, which may comprise framing supporting a supportive panel and interior framing portions, may be mounted adjacent to a supportive panel. Mounting pins may be installed to media displays. Pivotal supports (e.g., hinges) may be mounted to media displays and to a framing system adjacent to a supportive panel. Media displays may be adjacent to each other. Media displays may be pivotable about respective pivotal supports relative to a supportive panel. Media displays may be pivoted toward a supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane. A retaining clip may be installed that is configured to engage the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays. In some embodiments, a retaining clip may be removed and media displays may be pivoted away from a supportive panel. Media displays and/or a supportive panel may be serviced while one or more media displays are pivoted away from the supportive panel. The servicing may include repairing, replacing and/or cleaning the supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window. The supportive panel may be tintable window. The servicing may include replacement, repair and/or cleaning of electrical components and/or communication components associated with the window. The framing system may be framing of a window. The framing of the window may include transoms and/or mullions. The servicing may include repairing, replacing and/or cleaning one or more of the media panels. After servicing a supportive panel, one or more of the media displays or both the supportive panel and one or more of the media displays, the media displays may be pivoted toward the supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane. A retaining clip may be installed that is configured to engage the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays.

FIG. 51 shows an example of installation and alignment of media displays. A framing system, which may comprise framing supporting a supportive panel and interior framing portions, is mounted adjacent to a supportive panel, 5101. Mounting pins are installed to media displays, 5102. Pivotal supports (e.g., hinges) are mounted to media displays and to a framing system adjacent to a supportive panel, 5103. Media displays are pivotable about respective pivotal supports relative to a supportive panel. Media displays are pivoted toward a supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane, 5104. A retaining clip is installed that is configured to engage the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays, 5105.

FIG. 52 shows an example of servicing of media displays, support panels or both. A retaining clip is removed, 5201, and media displays are pivoted away from a supportive panel, 5202. Media displays and/or a supportive panel may be serviced, 5203, while one or more media displays are pivoted away from the supportive panel. The servicing may include repairing, replacing and/or cleaning the supportive panel. The servicing may include repairing, replacing and/or cleaning one or more of the media panels. After servicing a supportive panel, one or more of the media displays or both the supportive panel and one or more of the media displays, the media displays are pivoted toward the supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane, 5204. A retaining clip is installed that engages the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays, 5205.

In some instances, the display construct laminate may break over time, e.g., due to imperfections in its lamination (e.g., see FIGS. 2 and 8 ). For example, when the binder (e.g., a laminate and/or adhesive such as 806 and/or 808) does not extend to the glass portion (e.g., 804 and/or 808) of the display construct. Such absence of laminate may exert pressure on the glass upon installation, assembly (e.g., framing), and/or use, and causes it to crack or break. In some embodiment, a seal is added to one or more sides of the display construct, e.g., to alleviate compromised lamination. The seal may comprise a polymer (e.g., comprising organic or silicone based polymer). The seal may comprise a stiffening gel. The seal may comprise a high modulus Silicone such as room-temperature-vulcanizing silicone (RTV silicone). The seal may strengthen the laminate of the display construct. For example, the seal may strengthen one or more edges of the display construct, e.g., to prevent cracks from forming and/or breakage from occurring. The seal may comprise a solid, or semisolid (e.g., gel) material. The sealing material may be applied to one or more edges and/or sides of the display construct as a liquid or as a gel, and allowed to cure to stiffen (e.g., polymerize), e.g., to form a stiffer and/or stronger (e.g., solid) material as compared to the material at its applied state. Curing may be at room temperature (e.g., about from about 20° C. to about 25° C.), or at a temperature higher than room temperature. curing may require electromagnetic activation (e.g., using ultraviolet light). The seal may comprise polyurethane, polyester, epoxy, or rubber. The seal may have a harness from about 15 shore to about 40 Shore A. The seal may comprise a gasket. The seal may be molded to one or more sides of the display construct in situ. The seal may applied to the display construct before the display construct is coupled to the hinge. The seal may applied to the display construct before the display construct is installed in the framing. The seal may applied to the display construct after the display construct is coupled to the hinge. The seal may applied to the display construct after the display construct is installed in the framing. The seal may comprise one or more filler materials (e.g., acetic acid). The seal may be generated by reacting dimethyl dichloro-silane with water (e.g., using a platinum or tin catalyst). The seal may be have a high-temperature resistance such as up to at least about 100° C., 150° C. or 205° C., 400° F.

FIG. 55A shows an example of a display construct disposed in a framing 5512 and coupled to a hinge 5511. The display construct comprises a laminate having a first glass portion 5504 and a second glass portion 5505, laminated with a binder that does not extend to the ends of glass portions 5504 and 5505, thus subjecting the display construct (e.g., glass portion(s) thereof) to potential breakage and/or cracking over time such as upon installation, assembly, and/or use. The hinge portion 5511 comprises a fan 5501 and a circuit board 5503. The display construct is coupled to a touch screen functionality 5502.

FIG. 55B shows an example of a display construct disposed in a framing 5562 and coupled to a hinge 5561. The display construct comprises a laminate having a first glass portion 5554 and a second glass portion 5555, laminated with a binder (not shown) that does not extend to the ends of glass portions 5554 and 5555, which display construct edge is strengthened by a sealing material (e.g., a seal) 5560, e.g., in areas of the display construct to which the binder does not extend to. The hinge portion 5561 comprises a fan 5551 and a circuit board 5553. The display construct is coupled to a touch screen functionality 5552.

While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown, and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. It is not intended that the invention be limited by the specific examples provided within the specification. While the invention has been described with reference to the afore-mentioned specification, the descriptions and illustrations of the embodiments herein are not meant to be construed in a limiting sense. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. Furthermore, it shall be understood that all aspects of the invention are not limited to the specific depictions, configurations, or relative proportions set forth herein which depend upon a variety of conditions and variables. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein might be employed in practicing the invention. It is therefore contemplated that the invention shall also cover any such alternatives, modifications, variations, or equivalents. It is intended that the following claims define the scope of the invention and that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents be covered thereby. 

1. A device for aligning media displays of a matrix of media displays, the device comprising: a retaining clip configured to (i) be mounted to a first media display and to a second media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first media display and of the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (iii) retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display and of the second media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display, and (iv) be disposed adjacent to a first end of the first media display and to a second end of the second media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display in the matrix of media displays.
 2. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display, of the second media display, and of a supportive structure to which the first media display and the second media display are coupled to, during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display.
 3. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configure to be removably mounted to the first media display and to the second media display.
 4. (canceled)
 5. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to be removably mounted to the first media display and to the second media display at least in part by being configured to engage and disengage with the first media display and with the second media display.
 6. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to be removably mounted (a) to the first media display through a first framing of the first media display, and (b) to the second media display through a second framing of the second media display.
 7. The device of claim 1, wherein the first media display is coupled to a side of a supportive panel on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end.
 8. The device of claim 7, wherein the first media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a first hinge, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a second hinge.
 9. The device of claim 8, wherein the first hinge facilitates swiveling of the first media display with respect to the supportive panel about a first hinge joint, and wherein the second hinge facilitates swiveling of the second media display with respect to the supportive panel about a second hinge joint.
 10. The device of claim 9, wherein the retaining clip is configured to hinder swiveling of the first media display and the second media display when the retaining clip is mounted to the first media display and the second media display.
 11. (canceled)
 12. The device of claim 7, wherein the supportive panel comprises a window and the window is a tintable window. 13-19. (canceled)
 20. The device of claim 1, wherein the first media display includes a first pin extending therefrom, the second media display includes a second pin extending therefrom, and the retaining clip is configured to engage with the first pin and with the second pin, to facilitate (i) the alignment of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or (ii) retain, or substantially retain, the relative positions of the first media display and the second media display over time and/or during operation.
 21. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to couple to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm extending in a first direction across a window and secured to a window framing system, (ii) a second arm extending in a second direction, generally normal to the first direction, which second arm extends across the media display matrix and is configured to secure the media display to the window framing system, and (iii) a joint securing the first arm to the second arm and removably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portion that is disposed between the first media display and the second media display.
 22. The device of claim 21, wherein the retaining clip comprises (i) a first leg configured to align the first media display with the second media in the same plane or in substantially the same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, and (ii) a second leg extending from the joint generally normal from the first leg and configured to facilitate mounting of the retaining clip.
 23. The device of claim 21, wherein the interior framing portion includes a semi-permeable material (a) between the first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays, and/or (b) between the second arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays.
 24. The device of claim 23, wherein the semi-permeable material is configured to compress to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or to allow for air flow through the semi-permeable material.
 25. (canceled)
 26. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to (i) be mounted to the first media display, to the second media display, to a third media display, and to a fourth media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (iii) retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display, and (iv) be disposed adjacent to the first end of the first media display, to the second end of the second media display, to a third end of the third media display and to a fourth end of the fourth media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the third media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the fourth media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the first media display, in the matrix of media displays.
 27. The device of claim 26, wherein the retaining clip comprises (i) a first leg extending from a retaining clip center, which first leg is configured to align the first media display with the second media in the same plane or in substantially the same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second media display is coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end, (ii) a second leg extending from the retaining clip center in a lateral direction opposite to that of the first leg, which second leg is configured to align the third media display with the fourth media in the same plane or in substantially the same plane, wherein the third media display is coupled to the second leg on a third side of the third media display opposing a third end of the third media display, wherein the fourth media display is coupled to the second leg on a fourth side of the fourth media display opposing a fourth end of the fourth media display, and (iii) a third leg extending generally normal from the first leg and the second leg, which third leg is configured to facilitating mounting of the retaining clip.
 28. (canceled)
 29. The device of claim 1, wherein the retaining clip is configured to couple to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm that extends across a window and is secured to a window framing system, wherein the first arm comprises a curvature with upstanding flanges, and (ii) a semi-permeable material configured to mount between the first arm and the first media display, the second media display or both the first and second media displays.
 30. The device of claim 29, wherein the semi-permeable material is configured to compress to maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or configured to allow for air flow through the semi-permeable material. 31-33. (canceled)
 34. A method for aligning media displays of a media display matrix, the method comprising: mounting a retaining clip with a first media display and with a second media display, which mounting facilitates (i) aligning of the first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (ii) retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media display and of the second media display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display and with the second media display, which retaining clip is mounted such that it is disposed adjacent to a first end of the first media display and to a second end of the second media display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display in the matrix of media displays. 35-48. (canceled) 